Man Sicam Q100 Us PDF

MAN_SICAM_Q100_US.
book Page 1 Monday, October 21, 2019 1:48 PM
Preface
Open Source Software
Contents
User Information 1
Class A Power Quality
Instrument and
Overview 2
Power Monitoring Device Device Design 3
Measured Quantities and Recording 4
SICAM Q100
Energy Management 5
7KG95xx
Security 6
V2.20 Getting Started 7
Device Manual
Connection Principle 8
Operation at Use of a PC 9
Operation at Use of the Display 10
Time Synchronization 11
Maintenance, Storage, Transport 12
Failures and LED Indications 13
Technical Data 14
Operational Indications 15
Operating Parameters 16
Glossary
Appendix
Index
E50417-H1040-C522-A7
MAN_SICAM_Q100_US.book Page 2 Monday, October 21, 2019 1:48 PM
NOTE
For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright
Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this Copyright Siemens 2019. All rights reserved.
document only contains general descriptions and/or performance
features which may not always specifically reflect those described, The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
or which may undergo modification in the course of further document, or utilization and communication of the content are not
development of the products. The requested performance permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights, including rights
features are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or a design,
the concluded contract. are reserved.
Document version: E50417-H1040-C522-A7.04 Trademarks

Edition10.2019
Version of the product described: V2.20 SIPROTEC™, DIGSI™, SIGRA™, SIGUARD™, SAFIR™,
SICAM™, and MindSphere™ are trademarks of Siemens. Any
unauthorized use is prohibited. All other designations in this
document may represent trademarks whose use by third parties
for their own purposes may violate the proprietary rights of the
owner..
Preface
Purpose of this Manual

This manual describes the application, functions, installation, commissioning, and operation of the Class A
Power Quality Instrument and Power Monitoring Device SICAM Q100 7KG95xx.
Target Group
This manual is intended for project engineers, commissioning and operating personnel in electrical systems
and power plants.
Scope of Validity of this Manual

This manual is valid for the Class A Power Quality Instrument and Power Monitoring Device SICAM Q100
7KG95xx.
Further Support
For any questions concerning your system, please contact your Siemens representative.
The Siemens Customer Support Center provides around-the-clock support.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
Internet: www.siemens.com/powerquality
e-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
If you are interested in our current training program, please contact our training center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstr. 59
D-90459 Nuremberg
Tel.: +49 (911) 433-7415

Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
Internet: https://www.siemens.com/poweracademy
e-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 3

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Notes On Safety
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module,
device). However, it comprises important information that must be noted for purposes of personal safety, as
well as in order to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the
degree of danger.
DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken.
✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent death or severe injury.
WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury can occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken.
✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent death or severe injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION means that minor or moderate injury can occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken.
✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent minor injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that damage to property can occur if the appropriate safety measures are not taken.
✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent damage to property.
NOTE
is important information about the product, the handling of the product, or the part of the documentation in
question to which special attention must be paid.
4 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Personnel Qualified in Electrical Engineering

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission, iso-
late, ground, and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Use as Prescribed
The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those described in the Catalog
and the Technical Description. If it is used together with third-party devices and components, these must be
recommended or approved by Siemens.
If the device is not used in accordance with the Product Information and this manual, the scheduled protection
is impaired.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:

• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup, and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance
When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper ac-
tion is not taken, death, severe injury, or property damage can result.
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Equipment with exposed current transformer circuits must not be operated. Prior to disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limit values stated in the document may not be exceeded. This must also be considered during testing
and commissioning.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Used Symbols
No. Symbol Description

1 Direct current
IEC 60417-5031
2 Alternating current
IEC 60417-5032
3 Direct and alternating current

IEC 60417-5033
4 Three-phase alternating current
5 Earth (ground) terminal

IEC 60417-5017
6 Protective conductor terminal

IEC 60417-5019
7 Caution, risk of electric shock
8 Caution, risk of danger

ISO 7000-0434
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and

electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Statement of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
Council Directive 2004/108/EC - valid until April 19th, 2016; EMC Council Directive 2014/30/EU -
valid as of April 19th, 2016) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage
limits (Low voltage Directive 2006/95/EC - valid until April 19th, 2016; Low voltage Directive 2014/
35/ EU - valid as of April 20th, 2016).
This conformity has been established by means of tests conducted by Siemens according to the
Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the
EMC directives, and with the standard EN 61010-1 for the low-voltage directive.
The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms to the standard IEC 62586-1, Ed. 1.
Further Standards
This product is UL-certified to Standard UL 61010-1, third edition, based on the specification stated in chapter 14.
UL File No.: E228586
Open-type Measuring Equipment

2UD1
For further information see UL database on the internet: https://ul.com.
Choose Online Certifications Directory and insert E228586 under UL File Number.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Open Source Software
The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS.
These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those license conditions
will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the event of conflicts
between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the Open Source Soft-
ware conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the software.
The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software License
Conditions provide for it, you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your Siemens sales
contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years since purchase
of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in it pursuant to
the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for the Open Source Software beyond the program
flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability for defects resulting from modifi-
cations to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We do not provide any technical sup-
port for the Product if it has been modified.
NOTE
To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1 Device Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3 Device Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2 Display and Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3 Terminal Diagram of the Back Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4 Measured Quantities and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4.1 Power Quality Measuring System and Recording System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.1.1 Measuring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.1.2 Flicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.1.3 Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1.4 Mains Signaling Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.5 Rapid Voltage Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.1.6 Harmonic Power and Harmonic Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.1.7 Recording of Measured Quantities and Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.2 Measured Quantities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.2.1 Measured Quantities Depending on the Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.2.2 Data Availability of Measured Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.2.3 Recording and Evaluation of Measured Quantities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.3 Display of Measured Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.3.1 Measured Quantities and Operational Measurement Uncertainty acc. to IEC 62586-1 Product Stand-
ard, Class A, Standards IEC 61000-4-30, Ed. 3, IEC 61000-4-7, and IEC 61000-4-15 . . . . . . . . . 76
4.3.2 Measured Quantities and Operational Measurement Accuracy acc. to IEC 61557-12. . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3.3 Accuracy of the Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5 Energy Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.1 Load-Profile Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.1.2 Methods of Load-Profile Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.1.3 Historical Load-Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1.4 Current Load-Profile Data at the Communication Interfaces and in the User Interface . . . . . . . . . 86
5.1.5 Synchronization of the Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.2 Tariffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6 Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6.2 Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

6.2.1 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.2.2 Configuration via User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.3 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.3.1 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.3.2 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.4 Password Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.4.1 Function Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.4.2 Configuration via the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5 TCP/UDP Ports Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

7.1 Unpacking, Inspecting the Delivery, Installing, and Changing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.2 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.2.1 General Assembly Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.2.2 Environmental Protection Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.2.3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.3 Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.3.1 Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.3.2 Electrical Connection of SICAM Q100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.4 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.5 Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.6 Meaning of the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7.7 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.7.1 Initial Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.7.2 Changes During Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.7.3 Starting the Device with the Default IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
8 Connection Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

8.1 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.2 Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.2.1 Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.2.2 RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.3 Connection Types and Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.1 Using SICAM Q100 in the Power Systems IT, TT, and TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.2 Examples – Standard Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.3 Example - Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9 Operation at Use of a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

9.1 General Usage Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.2 Start and Design of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

9.2.1 Initial Start of the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.2.2 Enabling JavaScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.2.3 Changing the Buffer Mechanism (only for Microsoft Internet Explorer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.2.4 Changing the Security Setting (only for Microsoft Internet Explorer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.2.5 Number of Connections via HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.2.6 Layout of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.2.7 Starting the User Interface during Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.3 Configuration of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.3.1 Device Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.3.2 Access to the Passive Set of Parameters by Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.3.3 Setting the Operational Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
9.3.4 HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.3.5 Energy Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9.3.6 Recording and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.3.7 Setting Administrative Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.4 Value View and Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
9.4.1 Process Connections and Automation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
9.4.2 Evaluation and Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
9.5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
9.5.1 Firmware Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9.5.2 Formatting the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
9.5.3 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
9.5.4 Message Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
9.5.5 Evaluation and Data Management – Transient Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
9.5.6 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
9.6 AC Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
9.7 Example of a Parameterization and Measured Value Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
9.7.1 Task Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
9.7.2 Initial Situation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
9.7.3 Parameterization as Defined by the Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
9.7.4 Performing the Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
9.8 Flowchart of Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
10 Operation at Use of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10.1 General Operating Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10.2 Starting Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.3 Display Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.4 Parameterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10.4.1 Menu Tree of the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10.4.2 Measured Quantities Submenus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
10.4.3 Submenus for Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
10.4.4 Menu Tree of the Settings Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10.4.5 User-defined Screens Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
11 Time Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.2 Internal Time Keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.2.1 Time Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.2.2 Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.3 External Time Synchronization per NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
11.4 External Time Synchronization via Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
11.5 Internal Time Synchronization via RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
12 Maintenance, Storage, Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

12.1 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
12.2 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
12.3 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
13 Failures and LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

13.1 General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
13.2 Indications Signaled by LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
13.3 Troubleshooting, Repair, and Fallback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13.3.1 Troubleshooting and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13.3.2 Fallback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
14 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

14.1 General Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
14.1.1 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
14.1.2 Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
14.1.3 Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
14.1.4 Environmental Conditions and Climatic Stress Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
14.1.5 General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
14.2 Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
14.2.1 Electrical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
14.2.2 Mechanical Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
14.2.3 Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
14.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
15 Operational Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
16 Operating Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

16.1 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
16.1.1 AC Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
16.1.2 Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
16.1.3 Binary Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
16.1.4 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
16.2 Automation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
16.2.1 Limit Violation 1-8 and 9-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
16.2.2 Group Indications 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.3 HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

16.3.1 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.3.2 User-Defined Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.4 Energy Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
16.4.1 Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
16.4.2 Tariffs (TOU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
16.4.3 Energy Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
16.4.4 Energy Freeze and Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
16.5 Recording and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
16.5.1 Event Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
16.5.2 Trigger Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.5.3 Recorder Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
16.5.4 Mains Signaling Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
16.5.5 Memory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
16.5.6 Report Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
16.5.7 Recording Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
16.5.8 Transient Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
16.6 Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
16.6.1 Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
16.6.2 Ethernet Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
16.6.3 OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
16.6.4 Communication Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
16.6.5 Modbus Slave Devices 1 – 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
16.6.6 SICAM Subdevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
16.6.7 Device and Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
16.6.8 Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
16.6.9 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
16.6.10 Password Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
16.6.11 Syslog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
1 User Information
1 User Information
Application
The SICAM Q100 is a multifunctional device for the detection, processing, and evaluation of measured quan-
tities and events according to IEC 61000-4-30, class A, power quality (PQ) standard. The energy management
functions also allow determining load profiles and setting up to 8 tariffs. The device is used on all voltage levels
of power supply systems. SICAM Q100 is used in 1-phase systems and in 3-wire and 4-wire systems (with
neutral conductor). The device is mainly used by power utilities but also in other industrial and commercial sec-
tors.
In addition to the measuring function, SICAM Q100 features various recorders (for example, measured value
recorders) to record the measured quantities and the load profile in programmable time intervals. Long-term
data and events are analyzed and output as report according to power quality standards, for example EN
50160.
The input circuits for voltage measurement are galvanically isolated and can be used in IT, TT, and, TN
networks. To ensure galvanic separation for current measurements, the lines connected to the current
measuring inputs are galvanically separated from the current transformers.
The measurements are obtained from the alternating quantities of current and voltage supplied to the AC
inputs. When no external voltage and current transformers are used, the device can process rated input
alternating voltages of up to VPh-N = 230 V (110 V for UL condition) and rated input alternating currents up to 5
A.
The integrated web server can be used to set the parameters and display the measured values on HTML pages
from the connected computer. With the internal graphic display, a limited parameterization via softkeys can be
carried out on the front panel and measured values can be output via the display.
To communicate with the systems control and other process automation equipment and to transmit operational
measured values, metered values, indications, load profiles, etc., the device features an Ethernet interface and
an RS485 interface.
Measured quantities:
• Alternating voltage and alternating current
• Unbalanced of alternating voltage and alternating current
• Active, reactive, and apparent power
• Active, reactive, and apparent energy
• Power frequency
• Phase angle
• Power factor and active power factor
• THDS (Subgroup Total Harmonic Distortion) of alternating voltage and alternating current
• Harmonics and interharmonics of alternating voltage and alternating current
• Flicker acc. to IEC 61000-4-15
• Transients
• Mains signaling voltage (MSV)
The uncertainty of operational measurements of the measured quantities is defined as per IEC 62586-1 product
standard, class A (leading standard), the IEC 61000-4-30 power quality standard, and the IEC 62586-1, Ed. 1
standard.
For detailed information on measured quantities and measured values, see chapter 4.2 and the technical data
in chapter 14.1.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
1 User Information
Functionality of the Recorders
The recorders can record measured quantities, events, and load profiles in the configurable time intervals. The
following recorder types are used:
• Measurement recorder: recording of PQ measured quantities acc. to IEC 61000-4-30 (for example,
frequency, voltage magnitude) and non-PQ measured quantities (for example, currents, power) over
parameterized periods, for example, 10-second frequency, aggregation of voltage, current, power.
• Trend recorder: long-term recording and monitoring of the voltage change history over a parameterized
period of time in programmable tolerance ranges; 1/2 cycle RMS values
• Fault recorder: Recording of sampled values of voltage and current using programmable triggers,
maximum 256 samples per cycle
• Event recorder: recording of maximum 256 frequency events and voltage-unbalance events each, as well
as voltage events of which the maximum counter depends on the memory configuration
• Mains signaling voltage recorder: recording of mains signaling voltage on the supply voltage.
The device features a 2-GB memory for storing the recorder data.
Energy Management
As part of the energy management, SICAM Q100 records load profiles according to the Fixed Block and Rolling
Block method for all power quantities. Additionally, it is possible to calculate up to 8 tariffs (TOU = Time of Use).
The synchronization is made with external or internal triggers.
Communication
SICAM Q100 has an Ethernet interface and an electric RS485 interface.
Ethernet supports the device parameterization, transmission of measured data, metered values, load profiles,
and indications/events and the time synchronization with NTP. The communication protocols used are HTTPS,
Modbus TCP, and IEC 61850 server.
The RS485 interface supports the transmission of measured data, metered values, load profiles, and indica-
tions and the time synchronization. The communication protocol is Modbus RTU.
The integrated Ethernet switch in the device allows cascading further network components (SICAM
subdevices) via a Y cable and integrating them in an existing network with IEC 61850 or another Ethernet pro-
tocol.
Time Synchronization
During operation SICAM Q100 needs the date and time for all time-relevant processes. This ensures that a
common time basis exists when communicating with peripheral devices and enables time stamping of the
process data. The following types of time synchronization can be executed:
• External time synchronization via Ethernet NTP (preferred)
• External time synchronization via fieldbus using the Modbus RTU communication protocol
• Internal time synchronization via RTC (if external time synchronization is not available)
Parameterization
Parameters are set using an internal Web browser with HTML pages from the connected computer. Internet
Explorer 6 (or higher) is required for this purpose. Devices featuring a display offer a limited parameterization
function using the front softkeys.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview
2 Overview
2.1 Device Versions 20
2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories 22

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview
2.1 Device Versions
2.1 Device Versions

SICAM Q100 is a multifunctional device for the detection, calculation, recording, evaluation, display, and trans-
mission of measured electrical quantities with the following properties:
Consistent Device Properties
All devices consistently feature the following properties:

• Device type:
 Power Monitoring Device and Class A Power Quality Recorder with measured value recorders and
internal 2-GB memory
 Panel flush mounting device with display for measured values and parameterization
 Plastic case 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (W x H x D)
 Web server for parameterization, visualization, and data management
 Galvanically isolated voltage measuring inputs
 Transmitting measured values using communication protocols
• Input and output circuits:
 4 inputs for alternating voltage measurements
 4 inputs for alternating current measurements
 2 binary inputs for example, for synchronization pulses of the load profile or external triggers
 2 binary outputs
• Measurement acc. to standard IEC 61000-4-30, class A
• Measured quantities
 Voltage V
 Current I
 System frequency f (fundamental)
 Active power P (accuracy class 0.2S; ANSI C12.20 current class 2 and current class 10)
 Reactive power Q
 Apparent power S
 Energy measurements W
 Active power factor cos 
 Measurement up to the 63th harmonics/49th interharmonics of voltage and current
 Flicker acc. to IEC 61000-4-15
 Mains signaling voltage
 Harmonics phase angles, harmonic power
• Measurements for evaluation and supervision
 Minimum/mean/maximum values
 Event detection, for example voltage dips, voltage swells, voltage interruptions
 Limit violations
 Energy management (load profiles and tariffs)
 Transient detection
• Data export
 CSV data
 PQDIF data
IEEE1159.3: PQDIF for PQ records (events, measurements, records)
 COMTRADE data
IEC 60255-24/IEEE Std C37.111: Measuring relays and protection equipment – Part 24: Common
format for transient data exchange (COMTRADE for power systems) for fault records

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview
2.1 Device Versions
• Internal Ethernet switch

• Certificates
 CE certification
 UL certification
• Evaluations
 Output of power quality reports
Variants
SICAM Q100 is available in different variants:

• Communication via Ethernet
 Only Modbus TCP protocol
 Modbus TCP protocol or IEC 61850 server protocol
• Serial communication
 Without RS485 interface
 With RS485 interface:
- Modbus RTU slave protocol
- Modbus RTU master protocol and gateway function
• Degree of protection of front
 IP40
SICAM Q100
SICAM Q100, Display Side SICAM Q100 with RS485 Interface, Terminal Side
Figure 2-1 SICAM Q100

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview
2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
Scope of Delivery
The delivery comprises the following components depending on the ordering code:
• The SICAM Q100 device
• Battery (insulated in the battery compartment of the device)
• Mounting element
• Product Information
Accessories
You can order the following accessories:

• Device Manual E50417-H1040-C522 (download available at https://www.siemens.com/powerquality)
• RS485 bus terminating plug 220 W in a 9-pin D-sub connector plug
• Connectors for alternating voltage inputs
• Various cables as listed in the following tables:
Table 2-1 Cable Length
Cable Type Cable Length
RS485-Y Bus Cable 1m

(2-Wire, Shielded, with 9-Pin D-sub Connector Plugs)
3m
5m
10 m
RS485 Bus Extension Cable 10 m

(2-Wire, Shielded, with 9-Pin D-sub Connector Plugs)
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview
Table 2-1 Cable Length
Ethernet Patch Cable 0.5 m

(Double Shielded (SFPT), LAN Connector Plugs on
Both Sides) 1.0 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
10.0 m
15.0 m
20.0 m

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2 Overview

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
3 Device Design
3 Device Design
3.1 Mechanical Design 26
3.2 Display and Softkeys 27
3.3 Terminal Diagram of the Back Plate 28

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
3 Device Design
3.1 Mechanical Design
3.1 Mechanical Design

The device is designed for panel flush mounting. The electrical modules are installed in a plastic case with the
dimensions 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (W x H x D).
The display side of the device contains the display, 4 softkeys located below and 4 LEDs of which the H1, H2,
and ERROR LEDs can be parameterized. The ERROR LED can only be parameterized for error messages.
The device top side holds the RJ45 Ethernet plug connector with 2 LEDs. 4 more LEDs are identical to the
LEDs on the display side. At the cover of the battery compartment, there is a labeling strip for the configurable
LEDs H1/H2 and a battery symbol that indicates the polarity. The label is also on the top side and provides
among other information the most important rated data of the device. A lithium battery is located under the
removable cover of the battery compartment.
SICAM Q100 devices can also contain a D-sub connector plug as RS485 interface (see Figure 3-1) as shown
in the ordering information (see chapter 2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories).
Display side Terminal side

Cover of battery RJ45 with
compartment 4 LEDs Binary inputs
2 LEDs
D sub Binary outputs
LED RUN (RS485)
LED ERROR
Default IP address
LED H1 Default subnet mask
Softkeys Display LED H2 Terminal blocks for Terminal block for
F1 to F4 measurements (voltage, current) power supply
Figure 3-1 Layout of SICAM Q100

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
3 Device Design
3.2 Display and Softkeys
3.2 Display and Softkeys
Display
The layout of the display is shown in the following figure.
Title
Display area
Softkey functions
Softkeys F1 to F4
Figure 3-2 Display and Softkeys
The top line (title) shows the name of the current display in the display area.
The display area below shows parameter settings, measured values, and graphic pictures.
The bottom line shows the 4 current functions of the softkeys below the display used to set the parameters.
Softkeys
The 4 softkeys on the display side are used to make the desired entries at the device.
To call and activate the IP address, press softkey F4 (for > 3 s, see Figure 3-2) on the right during system
startup if necessary. The IP address and the standard subnet mask are imprinted on the side panel of the device
(see Figure 3-1).
The 10 Operation at Use of the Display 337 gives a detailed description of the softkey functions.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
3 Device Design
3.3 Terminal Diagram of the Back Plate
3.3 Terminal Diagram of the Back Plate
Figure 3-3 Terminal Diagram of the Back Plate

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
4 Measured Quantities and Recording
4.1 Power Quality Measuring System and Recording System 30
4.2 Measured Quantities 39
4.3 Display of Measured Quantities 76

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.1 Power Quality Measuring System and Recording System
4.1.1 Measuring System

SICAM Q100 devices measure the power quality according to IEC 61000-4-30 in 1-phase or multi-phase
distribution systems.
The basic measuring interval for determining the values for mains voltage, harmonics of mains voltage, and
mains voltage unbalance is 10 cycles for 50-Hz distribution systems or 12 cycles for 60-Hz distribution systems.
An overview of the measured quantities demanded in according to IEC 61000-4-30, their measurement
uncertainty and measurement ranges is represented in chapter 4.3.1.
4.1.2 Flicker
The flicker measurement is performed according to IEC 61000-4-15.
The short-term flicker value Pst and long-term flicker value Plt are determined for phase-to-ground voltages
and delta voltages. The flicker measurement is performed on all 3 voltage channels.
Flickers appear with a frequency from 0.005 to 35 Hz. The instantaneous flicker value is displayed in
perceptibility units P.
SICAM Q100 measures the following flicker types:

• Short-term flicker value Pst, determined over 10 min (short-term flicker), fixed
• Long-term flicker value Plt, over 2 h (12 Pst values), fixed
• Perceptibility Pinst

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.1.3 Transients
If the instantaneous value of the primary rated voltage exceeds the parameterized reference value at one or
several sampling points, the SICAM Q100 device detects temporary overvoltages as transients . Detect and
capture transients as short as 100 µs at 50 Hz (80 µs at 60 Hz).
The following data and values are determined during the evaluation of the transients in SICAM Q100 and listed
in the window Transient detection (see 9.4.2.7 Transient Detection 300):
• Serial number of the event
• Time when transients start to occur (time stamp with date and time)
• Affected phase (a, b, c, ab, bc, ca)
• Transient duration
Parameterized reference value (in %) is up to 240 % of the primary rated voltage.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Figure 4-1 Transient Detection
4.1.4 Mains Signaling Voltage

Mains signaling voltage (MSV) measurement is performed according to IEC 61000-4-30.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

SICAM Q100 detects mains singalling frequencies from 100 Hz to 3 kHz. The threshold for detection and
capture is from 1 % up to 15 % of Udin.
The following data and values are determined during the evaluation of the mains signaling voltage in SICAM
Q100 and listed in the window Mains signaling voltage (see 9.4.2.3 Mains Signaling Voltage 282):
• Time when mains signaling voltage starts to occur (time stamp with date and time)
• The values of the affected phase (a, b, c, ab, bc, ca)
Mains signaling voltage
Detection threshold
Time
Zoom
Detection threshold
Total recording duration Time
Pre-recording duration
Detected time stamp
The mains signalling voltage will be recorded if the instantaneous value of the MSV (on the user-specified carrier
frequency) is higher than a given threshold voltage. The recorder will not end until the Total recording duration is
reached.
The 10/12 cycle values of voltages are recorded. For detailed information on calculation of mains signaling voltage,
refer to IEC 61000-4-30.
Figure 4-2 Mains Signaling Voltage

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.1.5 Rapid Voltage Change
Rapid voltage change (RVC) is a quick transition of RMS voltage occurring between two steady-state
conditions, and during which the RMS voltage does not exceed the dip/swell threshold.
The threshold of RVC detection is configurable from 1 % up to 6 % of Udin.
The following data and values are determined during the evaluation of the RVC in SICAM Q100 and listed in
the tab Rapid Voltage Change (see chapter 9.4.2.1):
• RVC event start time
• RVC event duration
• ΔVmax
• ΔVss
• The affected phases (a, b, c, ab, bc, ca, a-b-c).
Figure 4-3 Rapid Voltage Change (RVC)
NOTE
Vrms(1/2): RMS voltage refreshed each half-cycle according to IEC61000-4-30 Ed. 3
100/120 Vrms(1/2) value: 100 values for 50 Hz nominal, or 120 values for 60 Hz nominal

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.1.6 Harmonic Power and Harmonic Angles

Measurement of phase angles is helpful to analyze different phenomena. The measurement can be used for
the following purposes:
• Evaluation of harmonic flows throughout the system
• Identification of harmonic sources and harmonic sinks
• Calculation of active, reactive, and apparent powers of harmonics
• Assessment of harmonic-current measurements in different points in the system
• Modeling of disturbing loads and evaluation of their disturbing effect
• Design countermeasures for disturbing loads
Therefore the SICAM Q100 provides these new measurements to support new evaluation alternatives that
support the customer in minimizing the influence of harmonics in the network or load, as defining mitigation
devices, filters, reactive compensation, etc.
Harmonic Directions
SICAM Q100 measures harmonics of currents, voltages, and powers up to the 63rd order. Measuring is done
according to the standard IEC 61000-4-7.
The following values are given for each harmonic:

• RMS value (for power: RMS value and sign)
• Phase angle
The sign of the active power of the single harmonic indicates the direction of power flow of this harmonic in a
system from the device installation point of view. Thus, it is possible to indicate loads that generate the
harmonics and that are probably the cause of the harmonics.
For voltage and current, the given phase angle of the harmonic refers to the voltage of the fundamental
component in respective phase. The phase angle between the current harmonic and the corresponding voltage
harmonic is used to calculate the sign of active harmonic power.
P(n) 0 P(n) < 0
Supply system Load
Measuring system
P(n) = U(n) x I (n) x cos(u(n) - i(n))
Figure 4-4 Principle of the Harmonic Directions
For measuring the RMS values and the phase angles, a 10-cycle interval is used for 50-Hz distribution systems.
For 60-Hz distribution systems, a 12-cycle interval is used.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Analysis of Harmonic Phase Angles
For the voltage and current harmonics, the following values are given additionally:
• Prevailing phase angle (Prev°; PreAngle in user interface)
• Prevailing ratio (PR)
The prevailing phase angle represents harmonic emissions for intervals (such as 10-min aggregation
interval). The Prev° indicates the phase angle of a certain load. The prevailing phase angle is calculated via
the aggregation time from the phase angles of the 10-cycle or 12-cycle intervals. In the graphics in the following
table, the prevailing phase angle is displayed as a red line.
The prevailing ratio indicates load fluctuations during aggregation and indicates the degree of the variation of
a phase angle. For a prevailing-ratio value of 1, the phase angle of the corresponding harmonic is constant
(PR = 1: no fluctuation). The phase angles of the large variation (see following table), which have a prevailing
ratio of <0.8, are high dispersal and the prevailing phasor has no useful meaning.
The table shows 3 examples for the relation between prevailing ratio and prevailing phase angle:
Table 4-1 Examples for Phase-Angle Variations
Phase-angle variation Low Variation Medium Variation Large Variation
Prevailing phase angle 43° 79° 19°
Prevailing ratio 0.988 0.88 0.2
However, the prevailing phasor only has sense if the harmonic phase angles have a low variation (the
measurements are not high dispersed in the complex plane). The prevailing ratio (PR) is proposed to indicate
how much the harmonic measurements vary in the complex plane.
NOTE
You find further information to this feature in the application note: www.siemens.com/powerquality.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.1.7 Recording of Measured Quantities and Events

SICAM Q100 provides different recording options to monitor and analyze the power quality and for the load
profile.
Table 4-2 Recording Measured Values
Storage interval/storage
Recording Measured quantity Application
method
10 s
Frequency
(fixed)
Mains voltage level
Unbalance of the
mains voltage
Harmonics and
Measurement interharmonics of the
recorder mains voltage 10 min Long-time monitoring of the
(30 s, 1 min, 10 min, 15 min,
More data power quality for example
30 min, 1 h, 2 h)
(for example, power according to EN 50160
values, min/max
values)
Pst determined over 10 min; Monitoring of the power

Flicker quality according to
Plt over 2 h (12 Pst values) IEC 61000-4-15
Voltage dips, Residual voltage Vrms (1/2)

Voltage interruptions and time stamp (duration) Long-time monitoring of the
power quality according to
Event recorder
Maximum voltage magnitude EN 50160, classification of
Voltages swells Vrms (1/2) and time stamp voltage events, for example
(duration) ITIC curve
For measured value changes Subsequent analysis of the

Trend recorder Vrms (1/2) cycle (in percent or absolute) and power quality with any grid
cyclic (time interval) codes
Voltage/current/binary
Voltages,
variation triggers, Analyzing the causes of
Fault recorder Currents,
acquisition of sampled values power quality problems
Binary
(max. 3 s)

Mains signaling Monitoring of the mains
Mains signaling triggers, start time, acquisition
voltages on the supply signaling voltage according
voltage recorder of 10/12 cycle voltages (max.
voltage to EN 50160
2 min)
Determining the load profile

Load profile re- Method Fixed Block or
Load profile for supply and consumption
cording *) method Rolling Block
of electric power
*) For detailed information on the load profile, refer to chapter 5.1.
The respective measuring interval of the recording is time-stamped to enable a correct time evaluation.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

The interaction of the recorders is depicted in the following figure:
V(t) Pst, Plt Measurement

Flicker meter Recorder
A/ D V(t)
Converter I (t)
Frequency
Measurement
Recorder
PQ events: Event
Interruptions, Swells Recorder
Vrms (½) Dips
V(t)/I(t) or
Irms (½)
V(t)/I(t) Sample points

Fault
Trigger Recorder
Changes on Trend
V rms (½ )
Recorder
Synchronization
Mains Signalling
Voltage Mains
Signalling
Voltage Magnitude Voltage
Recorder
Harmonics
Aggregation
Interharmonics
Unbalance
Measurement
Recorder
Current
V Power, Pf,
Load
Profile
Figure 4-5 Block Diagram of Recorders

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2 Measured Quantities
4.2.1 Measured Quantities Depending on the Connection Type
4.2.1.1 Operational Measured Quantities and Connection Types

Table 4-3 Operational Measured Quantities, Connection Types in Power Systems
3-Wire Network 4-Wire Network

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
Measured Quantity Circuit
System
Alternating Voltage
Va a-N x - - - x x x
Vb b-N - - - - - x x
Vc c-N - - - - - x x
Vab a-b - x x x - x x
Vbc b-c - x x x - x x
Vca c-a - x x x - x x
VN a, b, c - - - - - x x
a-N
 Vph-
Vavg b-N - - - - - -
n/3
c-N
a-b
 Vph-
Vavg b-c -  Vph-ph/3 - -
ph/3
c-a
a-b
Neg.seq.comp.V b-c - x x x - x x
c-a
a-b
Zero seq.comp.V b-c - x x x - x x
c-a
Alternating Current
Ia a x x x x x x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-3 Operational Measured Quantities, Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
Ib b - - x x - x x
Ic c - - x x - x x
IN a, b, c - - - - - x x
Iavg a, b, c - -  Iph/3 -  Iph/3
Neg.seq.
a, b, c - - x x - x x
comp.I
Zero seq.comp.I a, b, c - - x x - x x
Active Power Factor
cos (a) a x - - - x x x
cos (b) b - - - - - x x
cos (c) c - - - - - x x
cos  a, b, c - x x x x  cos ph/3
Power Factor
PFa a x - - - x x x
PFb b - - - - - x x
PFc c - - - - - x x
PF a, b, c - x x x x  PFph/3
Phase Angle
UIa a x - - - x x x
UIb b - - - - - x x
UIc c - - - - - x x
UI a, b, c - x x x x  UIph/3
ab V a-b - - - - - x -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-3 Operational Measured Quantities, Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
bc V b-c - - - - - x -
ca V c-a - - - - - x -
ab I a-b - - x x - x x
bc I b-c - - x x - x x
ca I c-a - - x x - x x
Frequency
f see
x x x x x x x
(System freq.) Table 4-22

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.1.2 Harmonics/Interharmonics, Connection Types

Table 4-4 Harmonics/Interharmonics, Connection Types in Power Systems

(Delta) (Star)
Measured Quantity
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
(x = 1 to 63,
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
y = 1 to 49) Circuit
System
x = 1: Fundamental
Harmonics, Voltage, Magnitude
H_Va-x a-N x - - - x x -
H_Vb-x b-N - - - - - x -
H_Vc-x c-N - - - - - x -
H_Vab-x a-b - x x x - - x
H_Vbc-x b-c - x x x - - x
H_Vca-x c-a - x x x - - x
Interharmonics, Voltage, Magnitude
HI_Va-y a-N x - - - x x -
HI_Vb-y b-N - - - - - x -
HI_Vc-y c-N - - - - - x -
H_Vab-y a-b - x x x - - x
H_Vbc-y b-c - x x x - - x
H_Vca-y c-a - x x x - - x
Harmonics, Current, Magnitude
H_Ia-x a x x x x x x x
H_Ib-x b - - x x - x x
H_Ic-x c - - x x - x x
Interharmonics, Current, Magnitude
HI_Ia-y a x x x x x x x
HI_Ib-y b - - x x - x x
HI_Ic-y c - - x x - x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-4 Harmonics/Interharmonics, Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
Measured Quantity
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
(x = 1 to 63,
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
x = 1: Fundamental
THDS, Voltage
THDS_Va a-N x - - - x x -
THDS_Vb b-N - - - - - x -
THDS_Vc c-N - - - - - x -
THDS_Vab a-b - x x x - - x
THDS_Vbc b-c - x x x - - x
THDS_Vca c-a - x x x - - x
THDS, Current
THDS_Ia a x x x x x x x
THDS_Ib b - - x x - x x
THDS_Ic c - - x x - x x
TDD, Current
TDD_Ia a x x x x x x x
TDD_Ib b - - x x - x x
TDD_Ic c - - x x - x x
K-Factor, Voltage
K-Factor_Va a-N x - - - x x -
K-Factor_Vb b-N - - - - - x -
K-Factor_Vc c-N - - - - - x -
K-Factor_Vab a-b - x x x - - x
K-Factor_Vbc b-c - x x x - - x
K-Factor_Vca c-a - x x x - - x
K-Factor, Current

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019


(Delta) (Star)
Measured Quantity
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
(x = 1 to 63,
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
x = 1: Fundamental
K-Factor_Ia a x x x x x x x
K-Factor_Ib b - - x x - x x
K-Factor_Ic c - - x x - x x
THDR, Voltage
THDR_Va a-N x - - - x x -
THDR_Vb b-N - - - - - x -
THDR_Vc c-N - - - - - x -
THDR_Vab a-b - x x x - - x
THDR_Vbc b-c - x x x - - x
THDR_Vca c-a - x x x - - x
THDR, Current
THDR_Ia a x x x x x x x
THDR_Ib b - - x x - x x
THDR_Ic c - - x x - x x
THD-2650, Voltage
THD-2650_Va a-N x - - - x x -
THD-2650_Vb b-N - - - - - x -
THD-2650_Vc c-N - - - - - x -
THD-2650_Vab a-b - x x x - - x
THD-2650_Vbc b-c - x x x - - x
THD-2650_Vca c-a - x x x - - x
THD-2650, Current
THD-2650_Ia a x x x x x x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019


(Delta) (Star)
Measured Quantity
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
(x = 1 to 63,
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
x = 1: Fundamental
THD-2650_Ib b - - x x - x x
THD-2650_Ic c - - x x - x x
THDI, Voltage
THDI_Va a-N x - - - x x -
THDI_Vb b-N - - - - - x -
THDI_Vc c-N - - - - - x -
THDI_Vab a-b - x x x - - x
THDI_Vbc b-c - x x x - - x
THDI_Vca c-a - x x x - - x
THDI, Current
THDI_Ia a-N x x x x x x x
THDI_Ib b-N - - x x - x x
THDI_Ic c-N - - x x - x x
Harmonics, Voltage, Angle/PreAngle/PR
H_Angle/PreAngle/
a-N x - - - x x -
PR_Va-x
H_Angle/PreAngle/
b-N - - - - - x -
PR_Vb-x
H_Angle/PreAngle/
c-N - - - - - x -
PR_Vc-x
Harmonics, Current, Angle/PreAngle/PR

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019


(Delta) (Star)
Measured Quantity
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
(x = 1 to 63,
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
x = 1: Fundamental
H_Angle/PreAngle/
a x - - - x x -
PR_Ia-x
H_Angle/PreAngle/
b - - - - - x -
PR_Ib-x
H_Angle/PreAngle/
c - - - - - x -
PR_Ic-x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.1.3 Measured Quantities of Power, Connection Types

Table 4-5 Measured Quantities of Power, Connection Types in Power Systems

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
Measured 1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
Circuit
Quantity System
Active Power
Pa a x - - - x x x
Pb b - - - - - x x
Pc c - - - - - x x
P a, b, c - x x x x  Pph
Reactive Power
Qa a x - - - x x x
Qb b - - - - - x x
Qc c - - - - - x x
Q a, b, c - x x x x  Qph
Apparent Power
Sa a x - - - x x x
Sb b - - - - - x x
Sc c - - - - - x x
S a, b, c - x x x x  Sph
Reactive Power (Fundamental)
Q1a a x - - - x x -
Q1b b - - - - - x -
Q1c c - - - - - x -
Q1 a, b, c - - - - x  Q1ph

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.1.4 Measured Quantities of Energy, Connection Types

Table 4-6 Measured Quantities of Energy, Connection Types in Power Systems

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
Measured Quantity 1) Circuit
System
Active Energy - Export
WPa_exp a x - - - - x x
WPb_exp b - - - - - x x
WPc_exp c - - - - - x x
WP_exp a, b, c - x x x x x x
Active Energy - Import
WPa_imp a x - - - - x x
WPb_imp b - - - - - x x
WPc_imp c - - - - - x x
WP_imp a, b, c - x x x x x x
Reactive Energy - Inductive
WQa_ind a x - - - - x x
WQb_ind b - - - - - x x
WQc_ind c - - - - - x x
WQ_ind a, b, c - x x x x x x
Reactive Energy - Capacitive
WQa_cap a x - - - - x x
WQb_cap b - - - - - x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-6 Measured Quantities of Energy, Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
WQc_cap c - - - - - x x
WQ_cap a, b, c - x x x x x x
Apparent Energy
WSa a x - - - - x x
WSb b - - - - - x x
WSc c - - - - - x x
WS a, b, c - x x x x x x
Frozen Active Energy - Export
WPa_exp a x - - - - x x
WPb_exp b - - - - - x x
WPc_exp c - - - - - x x
WP_exp a, b, c - x x x x x x
Frozen Active Energy - Import
WPa_imp a x - - - - x x
WPb_imp b - - - - - x x
WPc_imp c - - - - - x x
WP_imp a, b, c - x x x x x x
Frozen Reactive Energy - Inductive
WQa_ind a x - - - - x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-6 Measured Quantities of Energy, Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
WQb_ind b - - - - - x x
WQc_ind c - - - - - x x
WQ_ind a, b, c - x x x x x x
Frozen Reactive Energy - Capacitive
WQa_cap a x - - - - x x
WQb_cap b - - - - - x x
WQc_cap c - - - - - x x
WQ_cap a, b, c - x x x x x x
Frozen Apparent Energy
WSa a x - - - - x x
WSb b - - - - - x x
WSc c - - - - - x x
WS a, b, c - x x x x x x
1) Use 10/12 cycles RMS value for calculation.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.1.5 Flicker, MSV, and Connection Types

Table 4-7 Flicker, MSV, and Connection Types in Power Systems

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
Short-Term Flicker
Pst_a-N a-N x - - - x x -
Pst_b-N b-N - - - - - x -
Pst_c-N c-N - - - - - x -
Pst_ab a-b - x x x - - x
Pst_bc b-c - x x x - - x
Pst_ca c-a - x x x - - x
Long-Term Flicker
Plt_a-N a-N x - - - x x -
Plt_b-N b-N - - - - - x -
Plt_c-N c-N - - - - - x -
Plt_ab a-b - x x x - - x
Plt_bc b-c - x x x - - x
Plt_ca c-a - x x x - - x
Instantaneous Flicker Sensation
Pinst-a-N a-N x - - - x x -
Pinst-b-N b-N - - - - - x -
Pinst-c-N c-N - - - - - x -
Pinst-ab a-b - x x x - - x
Pinst-bc b-c - x x x - - x
Pinst-ca c-a - x x x - - x
Main Signaling Voltage (MSV)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-7 Flicker, MSV, and Connection Types in Power Systems (cont.)

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
Balanced (1I)
System
Msv_a-N a-N x - - - x x -
Msv_b-N b-N - - - - - x -
Msv_c-N c-N - - - - - x -
Msv_ab a-b - x x x - - x
Msv_bc b-c - x x x - - x
Msv_ca c-a - x x x - - x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.1.6 Measured Quantities of Harmonics Power, Connection Types

Table 4-8 Measurements of Harmonics Power, Connection Types in Power Systems

(Delta) (Star)
PQ Values for ph-ph

PQ Values for ph-N
Measured Quantity
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
1-phase
Balanced (1I)
(x = 1 to 63) Circuit
Balanced
System
x1 = Fundamental
(1I)
Harmonics Active Power
H_Pa-x a x - - - x x -
H_Pb-x b - - - - - x -
H_Pc-x c - - - - - x -
SumPa a  H_Pa-x - - - -  H_Pa-x -
SumPb b - - - - -  H_Pb-x -
SumPc c - - - - -  H_Pc-x -
Harmonics Reactive Power
H_Qa-x a x - - - x x -
H_Qb-x b - - - - - x -
H_Qc-x c - - - - - x -
SumQa a  H_Qa-x - - - -  H_Qa-x -
SumQb b - - - - -  H_Qb-x -
SumQc c - - - - -  H_Qc-x -
Harmonics Apparent Power
H_Sa-x a x - - - x x -
H_Sb-x b - - - - - x -
H_Sc-x c - - - - - x -
SumSa a  H_Sa-x - - - -  H_Sa-x -
SumSb b - - - - -  H_Sb-x -
SumSc c - - - - -  H_Sc-x -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.2 Data Availability of Measured Quantities
4.2.2.1 Data Availability of the Operational Measured Quantities
Table 4-9 Data Availability of the Operational Measured Quantities
Operational Measured
Quantities
Limit violation HTML and Display
Protocol/Interface
Measured Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU,
Quantity IEC 61850
10/12 cycles 10/12 cycles 10/12 cycles

or or or
Alternating Voltage
Va x x x
Vb x x x
Vc x x x
Vab x x x
Vbc x x x
Vca x x x
VN x x x
Vavg x HTML x
Neg.seq.comp.V x x x
Zero seq.comp.V x x x
Alternating Current
Ia x x x
Ib x x x
Ic x x x
IN x x x
Iavg x HTML x
Neg.seq.comp.I x x x
Zero seq.comp.I x x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-9 Data Availability of the Operational Measured Quantities (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Quantity IEC 61850

or or or
Active Power Factor
cos (a) x x x
cos (b) x x x
cos (c) x x x
cos  x x x
Power Factor
PFa x x x
PFb x x x
PFc x x x
PF x x x
Phase Angle, Voltage & Current
UIa x x x
UIb x x x
UIc x x x
UI x x x
Phase Angle, Voltage
ab V x HTML x
bc V x HTML x
ca V x HTML x
Phase Angle, Current
ab I x HTML x
bc I x HTML x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-9 Data Availability of the Operational Measured Quantities (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Quantity IEC 61850

or or or
ca I x HTML x
Frequency
f (System freq.) x x x
4.2.2.2 Data Availability of the Harmonics/Interharmonics
Table 4-10 Data Availability of the Harmonics/Interharmonics
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU,
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
H_Va-x - x x 1)
H_Vb-x - x x 1)
H_Vc-x - x x 1)
H_Vab-x - x x 1)
H_Vbc-x - x x 1)
H_Vca-x - x x 1)
HI_Va-y - HTML -
HI_Vb-y - HTML -
HI_Vc-y - HTML -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-10 Data Availability of the Harmonics/Interharmonics (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
HI_Vab-y - HTML -
HI_Vbc-y - HTML -
HI_Vca-y - HTML -
H_Ia-x - x x 1)
H_Ib-x - x x 1)
H_Ic-x - x x 1)
HI_Ia-y - HTML -
HI_Ib-y - HTML -
HI_Ic-y - HTML -
Harmonics, Voltage, Angle/PreAngle/PR
H_Angle/PreAngle/ HTML
PR_Va-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Vb-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Vc-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Vab-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Vbc-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Vca-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
Harmonics, Current, Angle/PreAngle/PR
PR_Ia-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
PR_Ib-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
PR_Ic-x
-
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
THDS, Voltage
THDS_Va x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS_Vb x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS_Vc x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS_Vab x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS_Vbc x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS_Vca x 10/12 cycles x 1)
THDS, Current
THDS_Ia x x x 1)
THDS_Ib x x x 1)
THDS_Ic x x x 1)
TDD, Current
HTML
TDD_Ia -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
TDD_Ib -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
TDD_Ic -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
K-Factor, Voltage
HTML
K-factor_Va -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Vb -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
HTML
K-factor_Vc -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Vab -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Vbc -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Vca -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
K-Factor, Current
HTML
K-factor_Ia -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Ib -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
HTML
K-factor_Ic -
(10/12 cycles) x 1)
THDR, Voltage
THDR_Va - HTML -
THDR_Vb - HTML -
THDR_Vc - HTML -
THDR_Vab - HTML -
THDR_Vbc - HTML -
THDR_Vca - HTML -
THDR, Current
HTML
THDR_Ia - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDR_Ib - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDR_Ic - -
(10/12 cycles)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
THD-2650, Voltage
HTML
THD-2650_Va - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Vb - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Vc - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Vab - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Vbc - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Vca - -
(10/12 cycles)
THD-2650, Current
HTML
THD-2650_Ia - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Ib - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THD-2650_Ic - -
(10/12 cycles)
THDI, Voltage
HTML
THDI_Va - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Vb - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Vc - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Vab - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Vbc - -
(10/12 cycles)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
(x = 1 to 63,
IEC 61850
y = 1 to 49)
x1 = Fundamental
or or or
HTML
THDI_Vca - -
(10/12 cycles)
THDI, Current
HTML
THDI_Ia - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Ib - -
(10/12 cycles)
HTML
THDI_Ic - -
(10/12 cycles)
1) It is not available for IEC 61850 report.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.2.3 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Power
Table 4-11 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Power
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850

or or or
Active Power
Pa x x x
Pb x x x
Pc x x x
P x x x
Reactive Power
Qa x HTML x
Qb x HTML x
Qc x HTML x
Q x HTML x
Apparent Power
Sa x x x
Sb x x x
Sc x x x
S x x x
Q1a x x x 1)
Q1b x x x 1)
Q1c x x x 1)
Q1 x x x 1)
1)
It is not available for IEC 61850 report.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.2.4 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Energy
Table 4-12 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Energy
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850
Active Energy – Export
WPa_exp - x x 1)
WPb_exp - x x 1)
WPc_exp - x x 1)
WP_exp - x x
Active Energy – Import
WPa_imp - x x 1)
WPb_imp - x x 1)
WPc_imp - x x 1)
WP_imp - x x
Reactive Energy – Inductive
WQa_ind - x x 1)
WQb_ind - x x 1)
WQc_ind - x x 1)
WQ_ind - x x
Reactive Energy – Capacitive
WQa_cap - x x 1)
WQb_cap - x x 1)
WQc_cap - x x 1)
WQ_cap - x x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-12 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Energy (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850
Apparent Energy
WSa - x x 1)
WSb - x x 1)
WSc - x x 1)
WS - x x
Frozen Active Energy – Export
WPa_exp - HTML x 1)
WPb_exp - HTML x 1)
WPc_exp - HTML x 1)
WP_exp - HTML x
Frozen Active Energy – Import
WPa_imp - HTML x 1)
WPb_imp - HTML x 1)
WPc_imp - HTML x 1)
WP_imp - HTML x
Frozen Reactive Energy – Inductive
WQa_ind - HTML x 1)
WQb_ind - HTML x 1)
WQc_ind - HTML x 1)
WQ_ind - HTML x
Frozen Reactive Energy – Capacitive

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-12 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Energy (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850
WQa_cap - HTML x 1)
WQb_cap - HTML x 1)
WQc_cap - HTML x 1)
WQ_cap - HTML x
Frozen Apparent Energy
WSa - HTML x 1)
WSb - HTML x 1)
WSc - HTML x 1)
WS - HTML x
1)
4.2.2.5 Data Availability of the Flicker
Table 4-13 Data Availability of the Flicker
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850
Short-Term Flicker
Pst_a-N x x x 1)
Pst_b-N x x x 1)
Pst_c-N x x x 1)
Pst_ab x x x 1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-13 Data Availability of the Flicker (cont.)
Quantities
Protocol/Interface
Measured Quantity
IEC 61850
Pst_bc x x x 1)
Pst_ca x x x 1)
Long-Term Flicker
Plt_a-N x x x 1)
Plt_b-N x x x 1)
Plt_c-N x x x 1)
Plt_ab x x x 1)
Plt_bc x x x 1)
Plt_ca x x x 1)
Instantaneous Flicker Sensation
Pinst-a-N x HTML x 1)
Pinst-b-N x HTML x 1)
Pinst-c-N x HTML x 1)
Pinst-ab x HTML x 1)
Pinst-bc x HTML x 1)
Pinst-ca x HTML x 1)
1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.2.6 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Harmonics Power
Table 4-14 Data Availability of the Measured Quantities of Harmonics Power
Quantities
Measured Quantity Limit violation HTML and Display
Protocol/Interface
(x = 1 to 63)
x1 = Fundamental
IEC 61850
Harmonics Active Power
H_Pa-x - HTML x 1)
H_Pb-x - HTML x 1)
H_Pc-x - HTML x 1)
SumPa - HTML -
SumPb - HTML -
SumPc - HTML -
Harmonics Reactive Power
H_Qa-x - HTML x 1)
H_Qb-x - HTML x 1)
H_Qc-x - HTML x 1)
SumQa - HTML -
SumQb - HTML -
SumQc - HTML -
Harmonics Apparent Power
H_Sa-x - HTML x 1)
H_Sb-x - HTML x 1)
H_Sc-x - HTML x 1)
SumSa - HTML -
SumSb - HTML -
SumSc - HTML -
1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.3 Recording and Evaluation of Measured Quantities
4.2.3.1 Recording and Evaluation of the Operational Measured Quantities
Table 4-15 Recording and Evaluation of the Operational Measured Quantities
Event
Measurement Recorder 1) Recorder Mains
Trend
2) Fault Signaling
Recorder Voltage
Recorder 3)
Measured 4)
Max. Min. Recorder 6)
Quantity AVG
Value Value
Values
PQDIF, CSV COMTRADE7) PQDIF COMTRADE7)
Alternating Voltage
Va x x x x x x -
Vb x x x x x x -
Vc x x x x x x -
Vab x x x x x x -
Vbc x x x x x x -
Vca x x x x x x -
VN x x x - x - -
Vavg x - - - - - -
Neg.seq.comp.
x x x - - - -
V
Zero
x x x - - - -
seq.comp.V
Alternating Current
Ia x x x - x - -
Ib x x x - x - -
Ic x x x - x - -
IN x - - - - - -
Iavg x - - - - - -
Neg.seq.comp.
x x x - - - -
I

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-15 Recording and Evaluation of the Operational Measured Quantities (cont.)
Event
Trend
2) Fault Signaling
Recorder Voltage
Recorder 3)
Measured 4)
Quantity AVG
Value Value
Values
Zero
x x x - - - -
seq.comp.I
Active Power Factor
cos (a) x x x - - - -
cos (b) x x x - - - -
cos (c) x x x - - - -
cos  x x x - - - -
Power Factor
PFa x x x - - - -
PFb x x x - - - -
PFc x x x - - - -
PF x x x - - - -
Phase Angle, Voltage & Current
UIa x x x - - - -
UIb x x x - - - -
UIc x x x - - - -
UI x x x - - - -
Phase Angle, Voltage
ab V x - - - - - -
bc V x - - - - - -
ca V x - - - - - -
Phase Angle, Current
ab I x - - - - - -
bc I x - - - - - -
ca I x - - - - - -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-15 Recording and Evaluation of the Operational Measured Quantities (cont.)
Event
Trend
2) Fault Signaling
Recorder Voltage
Recorder 3)
Measured 4)
Quantity AVG
Value Value
Values
Frequency
f
x x x - - - -
(System freq.)
10 s freq
(10 s freq.) x 5) x 5) x 5) - - - -
Mains Signaling Voltage
MSVa - - - - - - x
MSVb - - - - - - x
MSVc - - - - - - x
MSVab - - - - - - x
MSVbc - - - - - - x
MSVca - - - - - - x
1) Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 (PQDIF depending on the measuring interval) and Modbus TCP;
settable aggregation times: 30 s, 60 s, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h
2) Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 and Modbus TCP, HTML, HMI
determining overvoltage, undervoltage, and voltage interruption according to EN 50160, for example
3) Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850, HTML
4) Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850, HTML
1/2 cycle, RMS values
5) The frequency is permanently defined with 10-s mean value recording.
6)
Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850, HTML, 10/12 cycles, RMS values
7)
COMTRADE files include CFG file, DAT file, and HDR file

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.3.2 Recording and Evaluation of the Harmonics/Interharmonics
Table 4-16 Recording and Evaluation of the Harmonics/Interharmonics
Measured Quantity Measurement Recorder 1)

(x = 1 to 49,
y = 1 to 49) AVG Max. Value Min. Value
x = 1: Fundamental PQDIF, CSV
H_Va-x x x -
H_Vb-x x x -
H_Vc-x x x -
H_Vab-x x x -
H_Vbc-x x x -
H_Vca-x x x -
HI_Va-y x x -
HI_Vb-y x x -
HI_Vc-y x x -
HI_Vab-y x x -
HI_Vbc-y x x -
HI_Vca-y x x -
H_Ia-x x x -
H_Ib-x x x -
H_Ic-x x x -
HI_Ia-y x x -
HI_Ib-y x x -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-16 Recording and Evaluation of the Harmonics/Interharmonics (cont.)
Measured Quantity Measurement Recorder 1)

(x = 1 to 49,
y = 1 to 49) AVG Max. Value Min. Value
x = 1: Fundamental PQDIF, CSV
HI_Ic-y x x -
THDS, Voltage
THDS_Va x x x
THDS_Vb x x x
THDS_Vc x x x
THDS_Vab x x x
THDS_Vbc x x x
THDS_Vca x x x
THDS, Current
THDS_Ia x x x
THDS_Ib x x x
THDS_Ic x x x
1)
Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 (PQDIF depending on the measuring interval) and Modbus TCP;

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.3.3 Recording and Evaluation of the Power Types

Table 4-17 Recording and Evaluation of the Power Types
Measurement Recorder 1)
Measured Quantity AVG Max. Value Min. Value
PQDIF, CSV
Active Power
Pa x x x
Pb x x x
Pc x x x
P x x x
Reactive Power
Qa x x x
Qb x x x
Qc x x x
Q x x x
Apparent Power
Sa x x x
Sb x x x
Sc x x x
S x x x
Q1a x x x
Q1b x x x
Q1c x x x
Q1 x x x
1)
Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 (PQDIF depending on the measuring interval) and Modbus TCP; settable
aggregation times: 30 s, 60 s, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h.
NOTE
The load profile is recorded separately. See the explanations in the chapter 5.1.3.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.3.4 Recording and Evaluation of the Harmonics Power Direction

Table 4-18 Recording and Evaluation of the Harmonics Power Direction
Measured Quantity Aggregated Value Confidence
PQDIF
Active Power
Pa x x
Pb x x
Pc x x
1)
Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 (PQDIF depending on the measuring interval) and Modbus TCP; settable
aggregation times: 30 s, 60 s, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.2.3.5 Recording and Evaluation of the Measured Quantities of Energy

The recording and evaluation of the energy types is described in detail in chapter 5.
4.2.3.6 Recording and Evaluation of the Flicker
Table 4-19 Recording and Evaluation of the Flicker
AVG Max. Value Min. Value

Measured Quantity
PQDIF, CSV
Short-Term Flicker
Pst_a-N x - -
Pst_b-N x - -
Pst_c-N x - -
Pst_ab x - -
Pst_bc x - -
Pst_ca x - -
Long-Term Flicker
Plt_a-N x - -
Plt_b-N x - -
Plt_c-N x - -
Plt_ab x - -
Plt_bc x - -
Plt_ca x - -
1)
Interfaces: protocols IEC 61850 (PQDIF depending on the measuring interval) and Modbus TCP;

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.3 Display of Measured Quantities
4.3.1 Measured Quantities and Operational Measurement Uncertainty acc. to

IEC 62586-1 Product Standard, Class A, Standards IEC 61000-4-30, Ed. 3,
IEC 61000-4-7, and IEC 61000-4-15
Table 4-20 Measured Quantities and their Operational Measurement Uncertainty
Operat. Measurem. Uncertainty acc. to

IEC 62586-1, Class A,
Measured Quantity Unit Measurement Range
IEC 61000-4-30, IEC 61000-4-7,
and IEC 61000-4-15
±10 mHz in the measuring ranges:

10 mHz (see Table 4-22)
Frequency f Hz 50 Hz (±15 %): 42.5 Hz to 57.5 Hz
Magnitude of the supply > 2 V required
60 Hz (±15 %): 51.0 Hz to 69.0 Hz
10 % to 150 % Udin ±0.1 % Udin
AC 57.73 V to 400 V (autorange)

Voltage Vph-N/PE
V
 IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 230 V: 200 % overvoltage
(star)  > AC 230 V to 400 V: 200 % to 15 % overvoltage
UL conditions:
 to AC 170 V: 200 % overvoltage
 > AC 170 V to 300 V: 200 % to 15 % overvoltage
10 % to 150 % Udin ±0.1 % Udin
AC 100 V to 690 V (autorange)

Voltage Vph-ph
V
 IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 400 V: 200 % overvoltage
(delta)  > AC 400 V to 690 V: 200 % to 15 % overvoltage
UL conditions:
Acc. to class A, IEC 61000-4-30:

Flicker Pst, Plt - Pst, Plt: 0.2 to 10 Pst: ±5 %; Plt: ±5 %,
Accuracy Pinst: ±8 %
Undervoltages (dips)
and overvoltages Amplitude ±0.2 % Udin;
V, s -
(swells) of the mains Duration: ±1 cycle
voltage
Voltage interruptions of
V, s - Duration: ±1 cycle
the mains voltage
Measurement range for u2 and u0:

Voltage unbalance % ±0.1 %
0.5 % to 5.0 %

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 4-20 Measured Quantities and their Operational Measurement Uncertainty (cont.)
Operat. Measurem. Uncertainty acc. to

IEC 62586-1, Class A,
Measured Quantity Unit Measurement Range
IEC 61000-4-30, IEC 61000-4-7,
and IEC 61000-4-15
IEC 61000-4-7, class 1:

Condition: Vm > 1 % Vrated
Harmonics of 10 % to 200 % acc. to Maximum error: ±5 % Vm
% or V
voltage H_xVph IEC 61000-2-4, class 3 -------------------------------
Condition: Um < 1 % Vrated
Maximum error: ±0.05 % Vrated
Condition:
3 % to 15 % of Udin
Maximum error:
Mains signaling voltage ±5 % of measured value
MSVph-N(star) / MSVph- V 1 % to 15 % Udin -------------------------------
ph(delta) Condition:
1 % to 3 % of Udin
Maximum error:
±0.15 % of Udin
Udin: Primary nominal voltage, corresponds to the primary rated voltage in SICAM Q100
Vm: Measured value
Vrated: Rated voltage
u2: Value of Neg.seq.comp.V
u0: Value of Zero seq.comp.V

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.3.2 Measured Quantities and Operational Measurement Accuracy acc. to

IEC 61557-12
Table 4-21 Measured Quantities and their Operational Measurement Accuracy
Measurement
Measured Quantity Unit Rated Value Accuracy Class
Range
Current I Auto range (1 A

A 10 % to 200 % Irated 0.2
Acc. to parameterization to 5 A)
0 % to 100 % Irated ±0.2 % 2)

Current unbalance % -
Active power P
W - 1 % to 200 % Irated 0.2
+ demand, - supply
Reactive power Q
var - 2 % to 200 % Irated 1
inductive, capacitive
Apparent power S VA - - 0.2
0.5 inductive to 0.8

Power factor PF 1) - - 1
capacitive
Active power factor cos  1) - - -1 to +1 ±1 % 2)
Phase angle 1) Degree - -180° to +180° ±2° 2)
0.2
Active energy WP
Wh - 1 % to 200 % Irated Class 0.2S acc. to
+ demand, - supply
IEC 62053-22
2
Reactive energy WQ
varh - 2 % to 200 % Irated Class 0.5S acc. to
inductive, capacitive
IEC 62053-24
Apparent energy WS VAh - 2 % to 200 % Irated 0.2
Subgroup total harmonics

% - 0 % to 100 % ±0.5 % 2)
distortion of voltage THDS Vph
Subgroup total harmonics

% - 0 % to 100 % ±0.5 % 2)
distortion of current THDS Iph
Condition:
Im  10 % Irated
Maximum error:
±5 % Im
Harmonics of current H_xIph A - - -------------------------------
Condition:
Im < 10 % Irated
Maximum error:
±0.5 % Irated
1) Measurement from 2 % of the rated apparent power value onwards in the selected measuring range (see
chapter 14.2)
2)
The IEC 61557-12 standard does not specify any accuracy class for these variables. The specifications
refer to the maximum deviation from the actual value.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

4.3.3 Accuracy of the Frequency Measurement
Table 4-22 Accuracy of the Frequency Measurement
Circuit Accuracy
Voltage to Va-N 0 V to 2 V: invalid

> 2 V: 10 mHz
Voltage to Vb-N
Voltage to Vc-N
NOTE
The frequency measurement is carried out as software frequency measurement (Va-N, Vb-N, Vc-N > 2 V).
The frequency is measured first at the measuring circuit Va-N.
If the voltage Va-N is < 2 V, the measurement is performed automatically at the measuring circuit Vb-N.
If the voltage Vb-N is < 2 V, the measurement is performed automatically at the measuring circuit Vc-N.
If none of the voltages is > 2 V, the frequency measurement is invalid.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5 Energy Management
5.1 Load-Profile Determination 82
5.2 Tariffs 89

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.1 Load-Profile Determination
5.1.1 General
The load profile reflects the history of the electric power and documents the distribution of power fluctuations
and peaks. The load profile is determined on subperiods of 10/12 cycles (50 Hz/60 Hz).
SICAM Q100 supports 2 methods of load-profile determination: the Fixed Block method and the Rolling
Block method.
The load profile is stored in the ring buffer of the device and provided at the communication interfaces (see
chapter 9.3.5.1 and System manual). In addition, it can be output as CSV file.
The load profile can be recorded in synchronized or non-synchronized form. The synchronization is made
by external or internal triggers.
The following diagram shows a 45-min measuring period which consists of 3 subperiods of 15 min each.
The measured and calculated load-profile data are stored in the ring buffer at the end of each subperiod. After
3 subperiods, the average power value of the measuring period is calculated from the 3 load-profile data of the
subperiods. The values (cumulative values and averages) can be retrieved at any time within a subperiod via
the communication.
Measuring period
P
Subperiod (a) Subperiod (b) Subperiod (c)
Measured
Time of detection/Storage power Instantaneous cumulative
of load profile data average power at the
sampling point
Instantaneous
sampling point
Sampled value
Calculation of average
power about the
Mean value generation measuring period
subperiod (b)
Mean value about

the subperiod (a)
Mean value generation
subperiod (a)
10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 t

System cycle 15 min System cycle 30 min System cycle 45 min
Start
0 min
Figure 5-1 Power history of a measuring period consisting of three 15-min subperiods

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.1.2 Methods of Load-Profile Determination
NOTE
The parameterization of the load profile is described in detail in chapter 9.3.5.1. Note the information specified
there.
SICAM Q100 supports the following load-profile determination methods:

• Fixed Block
• Rolling Block
Fixed Block method
The Fixed Block method with a measuring-period length of 15 min is the default setting. In addition, the num-
ber of subperiods of this method is set to 1. The load-profile data are determined at the end of every measur-
ing period and stored in the ring buffer and transmitted, if necessary, or displayed on the user interface.
Measuring
period
3 Time of the recording of

the load profile data of the
ended measuring period
Duration of a
measuring period
15 30 45 t [min]
0
Figure 5-2 Determination of the load profile according to the Fixed Block method

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
Rolling Block Method
A measuring period of the Rolling Block method consists of 2 to 5 subperiods depending on the parameter-
ization.
The length of a measuring period is the product of the number of subperiods and the parameterized length of
the subperiod; see parameterization in chapter 9.3.5.1.
The following figure shows the history of the measuring periods during the load-profile determination:
Measuring
period
Example:
A measuring period consists of
5
3 subperiods (SP) with a SP SP SP
duration of 15 min each.
4 SP SP SP
3 SP SP SP
2 SP SP SP
Calculation/recording of the load

profile data from the 3 subperiods of
the ended measuring period
1 SP SP SP
Recording load profile data of

the ended subperiod
0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 t [min]
Start
Figure 5-3 History of the measuring periods for determination of the load profile according to the Rolling
Block method
Load-Profile Data at the Communication Interface
The following load-profile data are available during a measuring period:

• Average power values for all power quantities during the measuring period, calculated from the average
power values at the end of every subperiod (red dots in Figure 5-3)
• Average power values for all power quantities during the subperiods (blue dots in Figure 5-3)
• Maximum and minimum values for all power quantities within the subperiods
• Cumulated power values for all power quantities at every sampling point within the current subperiod
The arithmetic average power values and the extreme values per subperiod are stored in the ring buffer. The
cumulated power values can be retrieved via communication or displayed in the user interface.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
Load-Profile Calculation
Arithmetic average power value
The calculation of the arithmetic average power value of a measuring period refers to the actual duration of
the measuring period.
Special case: With constant power consumption or constant power supply, the arithmetic average power value
also remains constant in the current measuring period.
Cumulated power value
The power values are calculated cumulatively and the calculation refers to the length of the respective subpe-
riod.
Special case: With constant power consumption or constant power supply, the cumulated power value rises
linearly in the current measuring period.
5.1.3 Historical Load-Profile Data

SICAM Q100 records the following measured quantities:
Table 5-1 Historical load-profile data
Measured Cumulated Power Arithmetic Maximum Minimum Values

quantities Values Average Power Values
Values
PImport x x
±x ±x
PExport x x
QImport x x
±x ±x
QExport x x
S x x x x
Storage of Load-Profile Data
The load-profile data are stored in a ring buffer with up to 4 000 data sets. Every new data set overwrites the
oldest data set. Every data set contains the average power values, minimum/maximum values, a time stamp,
and status information for a completed subperiod.
The traceability of the load profile depends on the length of the subperiod:
• Fixed Block method: length of the measuring period = 15 min
• Rolling Block method: length of the subperiod = 15 min
On the condition that all periods correspond to the configured period length, the recording period is longer than
40 days.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.1.4 Current Load-Profile Data at the Communication Interfaces and in the User
Interface
The load-profile data of the current and last completed periods are output at the communication interfaces.
For information on the data transmission via the communication protocols Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Master,
and IEC 61850, refer to the System Manual SICAM Q100.
In the user interface, the load-profile data are displayed in the tab Value view and evaluation -> Load profile;
see chapter 9.4.1.8.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.1.5 Synchronization of the Load Profile
5.1.5.1 Types of Synchronization

At the beginning of every subperiod, SICAM Q100 expects a synchronization signal which can either be sup-
plied externally or created internally.
External supply of the synchronization signal:

• Via one of the binary inputs
• Via the communication interfaces
Creation of the internal synchronization signal:

• Creation through the internal clock of the device
Synchronization with External Synchronization Pulses
Synchronization via binary inputs or communication interface
SICAM Q100 checks whether there is a deviation from the set time or whether there are no synchronization
pulses. If a set tolerance is exceeded or if the value falls below this tolerance, the measuring period is short-
ened and marked accordingly.
If the time grid of the incoming pulses is shifted, SICAM Q100 adapts to the changed time grid automatically.
Particularities in the synchronization via communication interface
The synchronization telegram transmitted via Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU contains, among other things, the
length of the subperiods in minutes.
If the set length of the subperiods in the device does not correspond to the length in the telegram, the synchro-
nization pulse is ignored. Load-profile data are still recorded though based on the internal clock of the device.
Synchronization via the Internal Clock of the Device
If external synchronization is not possible, for instance, due to no synchronization pulse, the synchronization
can be configured with the internal clock of the device. The length of measuring period and subperiod depends
only on the internal clock of the device.
The starting time of the subperiod is the previous full hour plus a multiple of the configured length of the sub-
period.
Updating the time within the current measuring period or beyond the measuring period causes shortened mea-
suring periods and is given the information "resynchronized" in the time stamp.
Substitute values are not written for any gaps in the history.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.1.5.2 Special Conditions and Effects on the Load Profile
Device Restart
If a functional battery is installed in SICAM Q100, the existing load-profile records are kept unchanged.
Resetting the Device Clock
Resetting the device clock does not affect the load-profile recording. The historical load profiles with a date in
the future do not prevent resetting the device clock.
Failure of the Measuring Voltage
Failure of the measuring voltage does not affect the load profile.
Failure and Return of the Supply Voltage
When the supply voltage returns after a temporary failure, SICAM Q100 records shortened measuring periods.
Interpolated values are not written for load-profile data which were not recorded during the period.
Effect of Tariff Change
The low-to-high tariff change affects the load profile since all values stored in the load profile have been as-
signed to the valid tariff in a unique way.
The current period keeps the old tariff up to the period end. The new tariff is effective from the starting time of
the subsequent period. The power meters of SICAM Q100 change to the other tariff after the current measuring
period.
Additional Information on the Load-Profile Data
SICAM Q100 determines the following additional information for every period (see System manual
SICAM Q100, chapter 2, Load profile - Management):
• LOADPROFILE_FLAG_QUALITY_SYNC
SICAM Q100 triggered the period end prematurely due to a synchronization irregularity. As long as the
time has not been determined, the flag is set. The time can be undefined if the battery could not buffer the
time, for example, due to discharged battery.
• LOADPROFILE_FLAG_QUALITY_AUXPOWER_FAIL
The device triggered the period end prematurely due to supply-voltage failure.
• LOADPROFILE_FLAG_QUALITY_UNSECURE
The load-profile data are unsafe. Reasons are:
 Measuring current or measuring voltage are outside the specified range.

 The type of reactive power was changed.
The additional information is stored with the other load-profile data and can be retrieved via the communication
interfaces.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.2 Tariffs
5.2 Tariffs
NOTE
The parameterization of the tariffs is described in detail in chapter 9.3.5.2. Note the information specified there.
SICAM Q100 supports up to 8 tariffs for power meters for supplied or consumed active energy, reactive
energy, and apparent energy. If the tariff change is controlled, up to 8 tariffs can be set. If tariffs are changed
via binary inputs, up to 2 tariffs can be set. The value of the binary inputs which there is at the time of the
beginning of the subperiod at the binary input is decisive for it.
The tariff is changed via the external interfaces. A time-related tariff change is only possible by a superordinate
system.
Tariff Change on Load-Profile Synchronization

The recorded load profile is always assigned to the current tariff.
If, during a running measuring period, a tariff change is made, for instance, from high to low tariff, this has
initially no effect on the load-profile recording.
The new tariff becomes effective in the load-profile recording and in the power meters of SICAM Q100 only
with the start of the next measuring period.
Tariff Change without Load-Profile Synchronization
If no external and internal synchronization of the load profile is performed, the tariff change becomes effective
immediately. If in the parameterization of the load profile "None" has been selected as a synchronization
source, see chapter 9.3.5.1, a tariff change without synchronization exists.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5 Energy Management
5.2 Tariffs

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6 Security
6.1 Overview 92
6.2 Account Management 94
6.3 Security Settings 105
6.4 Password Management 107
6.5 TCP/UDP Ports Used 109

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.1 Overview
6.1 Overview
The following table contains an overview of the SICAM Q100 security features. Individual topics are explained
in the following chapters.
Table 6-1 Overview
Topic Description
HTTPS The device supports the following HTTPS features:

• For access to the Web UI of the SICAM Q100 device, the secure HTTPS-
communication protocol is used. Unencrypted HTTP access is not sup-
ported.
• The free software OpenSSL is used for the TLS implementation.
• The integrated Web only server supports connection requests with the
cryptographic protocol versions TLS1.2 and higher. Older versions are re-
jected due to security reasons.
• Only high-strength Cipher Suites (key length ≥ 128 bit) are supported.
• The device generates a self-signed TLS-certificate, and is therefore not
signed and confirmed by a certification authority. When using the SICAM
Q100 user interface, all browsers will show a message regarding an
unknown certificate warning about an untrusted connection. Due to the au-
thentication scheme used by browsers, Siemens cannot provide certifi-
cates (for example, during assembly) to be used for HTTPS with browsers.
This is because either the DNS name or the IP address of the device has
to be part of the signed certificate, both of which are ultimately determined
after installation at the site of the customer. That is why the products gen-
erate a self-signed certificate after the IP address has been set. This self-
signed certificate has to be trusted in a secure way on all clients used to
access this device. You can find the recommended way of trusting self-
signed certificates in the document Certificate trusting in web browsers.
you can find this document under http://www.siemens.com/gridsecurity,
Downloads -> Downloads Cyber Security -> Application Notes.
• As the certificate is linked to the IP address of the device, it is generated a
new with each change of the IP address.
Role-based access The SICAM Q100 device provides a role-based access control (RBAC)
control (RBAC) mechanism for account management. With the RBAC mechanism, the
permissions to perform certain actions on the SICAM Q100 device are
assigned to specific roles. For more detailed information, refer to chapter 6.2.2.
Audit log The device provides an audit log to track security-relevant events. Only a user
with auditor rights can access the messages in the audit log. For more detailed
information, refer to chapter 9.5.4.3.
Firmware with digital The integrity and authenticity of the firmware package is protected by a digital
signature signature. Only a firmware package with a valid digital signature can be upload-
ed into the SICAM Q100 device.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.1 Overview
Table 6-1 Overview
Topic Description
Syslog The SICAM Q100 device supports transmitting the audit logs to a central log
server using Syslog. For more detailed information, refer to chapter 9.3.7.8.
Automatic logout after a If there are no actions for 20 min after the last parameter change, the paramter-
timeout of no action ization is released again for other users.
Modbus TCP read only When communicating via Modbus TCP, the read-only access is configurable.
For more detailed information, refer to chapter 9.3.7.2.1.
Deploy in a Secured Environment Only
Siemens recommends protecting network access to its energy automation products with appropriate mecha-
nisms (for example, firewalls, segmentation, VPN). It is advised to configure the environment according to the
operational guidelines in order to run the devices in a protected IT environment. You can find the recommended
security guidelines to Secure Substations in Cyber Security General Downloads -> Manuals in the following
website: http://www.siemens.com/gridsecurity.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.2 Account Management
6.2.1 Function Description

The SICAM Q100 device provides a role-based access control (RBAC) mechanism for account management.
This function is a policy-neutral mechanism for access control to define the roles and privileges. With the RBAC
mechanism, the permissions to perform certain actions on the SICAM Q100 device are assigned to specific
roles.
Creating User Accounts
There is no default user account or default password provided for a newly delivered SICAM Q100 device. After
the newly delivered SICAM Q100 device boots up, you are required to create an initial user account with an
administrator role or a user account manager role on the Web UI.
Afterwards, you can log on with the created role and get access to Account management to create, change, or
delete the user accounts for the following roles:
• Viewer
• Operator
• Engineer
• Installer
• Security administrator
• Security auditor
• User account manager
• Administrator
• Backup operator
• Guest
The following table contains the access rights to different roles in the SICAM Q100 device:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
Table 6-2 Access Rights Assigned to Different Roles
Role Access to the Web UI Tabs
Information Configure Value View Maintenance

and
Evaluation
Guest View all Password management - -

pages
Viewer • View all operational settings View all View operational log, error logs,
• Password management pages and diagnosis data
Operator • View all operational settings • Format SD card

• Password management • Reset energy counters, date/
time, and min/max values
• Delete load profile buffer
• View/delete error logs, transi-
ent logs, and diagnosis data
Backup • View all operational settings • View operational log, error

operator • Password management logs, and diagnosis data
• Save configuration to files
Engineer • Modify all operational set- • View operational log, error

tings logs, and diagnosis data
• Password management • Enable/disable the customer
• Get device configuration support functions
• Open and save configurati-

Installer • Firmware upload
on from files
• View operational log, error
logs, and diagnosis data
• Enable/disable the customer
support functions
User • Account management - -

account • Password management
manager
Security • Account management - -

administra- • Security settings
tor
• Password management
• Syslog
• Activation/Cancel
Security Password management - View audit logs

auditor
Adminis- Full access to all pages View all Full access to all pages
trator pages

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
NOTE
Only a user with the role of administrator, security administrator, or user account manager has the permission
to access the Account management.
HMI Password
The SICAM Q100 device provides an option to use an HMI password. It determines whether the password for
actions at the device display is activated or deactivated. The HMI password is activated by default.
• If the HMI password is deactivated, all actions at the device display can be executed without entering a
password.
• If the HMI password is activated, you must enter a configured password to start actions at the device dis-
play.
6.2.2 Configuration via User Interface
Creating an Initial User Account
Figure 6-1 Creating an Initial Account
To create an initial user account, proceed as follows:
✧ In the Log on tab of the Web UI page, select Administrator or User Account Manager from Account
Type.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
✧ Enter a new user name and password according to the following table:
Table 6-3 Settings for Creating an Initial Account
Parameter Default Setting Setting Options
Account Type Administrator User Account Manager

Administrator
User name Empty Up to 64 characters
New password Empty 8 to 24 characters

Contains at least:
Repeat new password • 1 capital latin letter (A to Z)
• 1 small latin letter (a to z)
• 1 digital number (0 to 9)
• 1 special character from the set:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, @,

[, \, ], ^, _, {, }, ~.
✧ Click Confirm. An initial user account is created.
✧ Click Sign in.
Figure 6-2 Sign in, Account Management

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
✧ Enter the created user name and password in the Log on tab.
Figure 6-3 Log on Tab, Account Management
✧ Click Log on. The Information tab appears if the entered user name and password are correct.
Creating Local User Accounts with Different Roles
Figure 6-4 Creating Local Accounts

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
To create local user accounts with different roles in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Administrative and click Account management.
✧ Click Create local account.
✧ Create local user accounts according to the following tables:
Table 6-4 Settings for Creating User Accounts
New password 8 to 24 characters

Contains at least:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, {, }, ~.
Roles Click one or several option buttons to select a

role or several roles for a local user account
according to Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Overview of the Access Rights Assigned to Each Role
Description of the Access Rights Role
User Account Manager

Security Administrator
Backup Operator
Security Auditor
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Installer
Viewer
Guest
General information viewing x 1) x x x x x x x x x
Operation data viewing - x x x x x - - - x
Configuration settings viewing - x x x x x - - - x
Force values - - x - x - - - - x
Configuration downloading - - - x x x - - - x
Configuration change and uploading - - - - x x - - - x
Firmware change - - - - - x - - - x

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security

Backup Operator
Security Auditor
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Installer
Viewer
Guest
RBAC management - - - - - - x - x x
Security management - - - - - - x - - x
Audit trail - - - - - - - x - x
1) x represents that the user with this role is assigned with related rights.
✧ Enter the user name, the password, and select a role or several roles for the local user account.
✧ Click Confirm. A local user account is created.
Editing or Deleting an Existing Local User Account
Figure 6-5 Editing or Deleting a Local User Account

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
To edit an existing local user account, proceed as follows:
✧ Click the icon to edit the password or edit the role of an existing local user account.
Figure 6-6 Editing a Local User Account
✧ Edit the local user account according to the following table:
Table 6-6 Settings for Editing a Local User Account

Contains at least:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, ‘, {, }, ~.
Roles Click one or several option buttons to select a

role or several roles for a local user account
according to Table 6-5.
✧ Click Confirm. The user account is edited successfully.
To delete an existing local user account, proceed as follows:
✧ Click the icon to delete an existing local user account.
✧ If you want to delete all the local user accounts, click the button Delete all local user accounts shown in
Figure 6-5.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
As a result, the device restarts automatically. The Log on tab with creating an initial user account opens
after the device restarts, shown in Figure 6-1.
NOTE
To edit a local user account, you can choose to edit the password, the roles or both of the password and
roles.
NOTE
If the roles for the users who have the permission to access Account management are changed, the users
must log off and log on again to make sure that the roles are updated.
Setting the HMI Password
Figure 6-7 Configuration Tab, HMI Password
To set the HMI password in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
✧ Set the HMI password according to the following table:
Table 6-7 Settings for the HMI Password
Use HMI password yes no

yes
New password 000000 6 digital numbers (0 to 9)
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS Server)
The SICAM Q100 device supports the centralized user-credentials management with a RADIUS server since
V02.20. Only users with the roles of Administrator and User Account Management can configure the RADIUS
server via the user interface.
The RADIUS server is deactivated by default. The parameters under the RADIUS server are available and can
be configured only after you activate the RADIUS server.
The device supports 2 RADIUS servers:

• Primary RADIUS server
• Secondary RADIUS server
If both RADIUS servers are configured, the device firstly sends the authentication request to the primary RA-
DIUS server. The device sends the request to the secondary RADIUS server only if the primary RADIUS server
is not reachable.
Figure 6-8 Configuration Tab, Remote Authentication

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
To set the RADIUS server in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:
✧ Set the RADIUS server according to the following table:
Table 6-8 Settings for the RADIUS Server
RADIUS active no no
yes
Primary RADIUS server
IP address 0.0.0.0 Any
Port 1812 10 000 to 65 535
Secret Empty Any (16 to 32 characters)
Secondary RADIUS server
Port 1812 10 000 to 65 535

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.3 Security Settings

The SICAM Q100 device provides the security settings to configure the logon settings.
NOTE
Only a user with the role of administrator or security administrator has the permission to access Security
Settings.
6.3.2 Security Settings

The user with the account created with a role of administrator or security administrator has the permission to
configure the logon security settings.
Figure 6-9 Security Settings, RBAC
To configure the security settings in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Administrative and click Security settings.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
✧ Configure the respective parameters according to the following table:
Table 6-9 Settings for the Security
Maximum consecutive attempts 5 5 times to 12 times
Consecutive password attempt 5 1 min to 10 min

time period
Logon block timeout 30 30 min to 360 min
Session timeout 10 1 min to 1440 min (1 day)

If the device restarts, you must log on again.
✧ After the parameterization, click Confirm.
✧ In the navigation window, select the Finish configuration menu and click Activation.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.4 Password Management

To change the Web UI login password, the SICAM Q100 device provides the access to Password Manage-
ment.
6.4.2 Configuration via the User Interface
Figure 6-10 Changing Passwords, Password Management
To change the password in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Administrative and click Password Management.
✧ Change the password according to the following table:
Table 6-10 Settings for the Password Management
User name Fixed, not configurable The user name and roles depend on the settings
made by the account management.
Roles Empty 8 to 24 characters

Contains at least:
Current password • 1 capital letter (A to Z)
• 1 small letter (a to z)
New password
Repeat new password • 1 special character from the set:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;, <, =, >,
?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, ‘, {, }, ~.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
✧ Enter the new password.
✧ Click Confirm. The password is changed.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security
6.5 TCP/UDP Ports Used

The following table contains an overview of the TCP/UDP ports used.
Table 6-11 Overview
Communication Server/ TCP/ Port Activated Description

Protocol Client UDP by Default
HTTPS Server TCP 443 Yes TLS connection to a Web

browser for device configuration
and value view
NTP Client UDP 123 No Time synchronization
Modbus TCP Server TCP 502 Yes Communication with a station

controller using Modbus TCP
and Modbus default TCP port
Modbus TCP Server TCP 10 000 to No Port number is configurable in

65 535 the given range. Communication
with a station controller using
Modbus TCP and a user-defined
TCP port
IEC 61850 Server TCP 102 No Communication with a station

controller using IEC 61850
DHCP Client UDP 68 No Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol
Syslog Client UDP 514 No Syslog protocol
NOTE
One port cannot be assigned to more than one function at the same time.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
6 Security

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7 Getting Started
7.1 Unpacking, Inspecting the Delivery, Installing, and Changing the Battery 112
chapter 7.2
7.3 Electrical Connection 117
7.4 System Requirements 119
7.5 Access Rights 120
7.6 Meaning of the LEDs 121
7.7 Commissioning 122

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.1 Unpacking, Inspecting the Delivery, Installing, and Changing the Battery
7.1 Unpacking, Inspecting the Delivery, Installing, and Changing the

Battery
Unpacking
The SICAM Q100 has been safely packed for transport in the factory. Unpack the device with care and do not
use force. Use an appropriate tool if necessary. After unpacking, inspect the device visually for any mechanical
defects.
NOTE
If the device has been damaged during transport, do not connect and operate it.
Observe any additional notes enclosed with the packaging.
Keep the transport packaging for future transport.
Inspecting the Delivery
After unpacking, first compare the packing list against your original purchase order to check that the delivered
device has the desired rated data and functions and that all necessary and ordered accessories are enclosed.
Installing the Battery
If you want to operate the device immediately after the delivery, first insert the battery before beginning the in-
stallation. Upon delivery the battery is insulated in the battery compartment of the device.
If you want to operate the device later, insert the battery only just before you intend to use the device.
NOTE
The battery powers the battery-buffered memory (SRAM) and the real-time clock (RTC). But the device can
still be operated when no battery is inserted or when the battery is discharged. If, however, the supply voltage
is lost, all metered energy values and error reports are deleted and the real-time clock is reset
(2000-01-01 00:00).
Customer-specific parameters are permanently stored in the Flash-EPROM even without a battery.
To insert the battery, observe the notes in the supplied Product Information and proceed as follows:
✧ Lever the cover of the battery compartment out of the socket with a suitable tool (for example precision
engineer screwdriver 2.0 mm).
Cover of battery Polarity of

compartment the battery
Figure 7-1 Top side of the SICAM Q100

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.1 Unpacking, Inspecting the Delivery, Installing, and Changing the Battery
✧ Take the wrapped battery out of the battery compartment.
✧ Remove the plastic foil from the battery.
✧ Insert the battery into the battery compartment with the polarity imprinted on the top side of the device (see
Figure 7-1).
✧ Close the cover of the battery compartment.
Replacing a Used Battery
WARNING
Warning of incorrect treatment of the lithium battery (type PANASONIC CR2032 or VARTA 6032 101 501) or
the use of an incorrect battery type. In the case of incorrect treatment or the wrong battery type, the battery
may burn, explode or trigger a chemical reaction.
See product information for type of battery to be used.
Non-observance may lead to death or serious injury.

• Installing the battery or replacing it may only be carried out by trained personnel (see Preface) who are
familiar with and observe the safety requirements and precautions.
• Do not reverse the polarity of the battery.
• Do not short-circuit the contacts. Use non-conducting tools for removing and installing the battery.
• Do not attempt to open the battery.
• The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge,
disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate.
• Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.
Replace the batteries if the battery charge is too low (avoid full discharge). In this case the "Battery Failure"
operation indication is generated. This message can also be parameterized on one of the three LEDs H1/H2/
ERROR or switched to one of the binary outputs (see 9.3.3.1.3 Binary Outputs G1/G2 and G3/G2 166).
When the "Battery Failure" indication is displayed, replace the battery as follows:
✧ Lever the cover of the battery compartment out of the socket with a suitable tool (e.g. precision engineer
screwdriver 2.0 mm).
✧ Use an appropriate non-conducting tool (for example plastic tweezers) to pull the battery out of the
compartment.
✧ Remove the new battery type PANASONIC CR2032 or VARTA 6032 101 501 from the packaging (check
the expiry date on the packaging)
✧ Insert the battery carefully into the battery compartment with the polarity indicated above the battery
compartment.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.2 Assembly
✧ Press the cover of the battery compartment back into the housing and make sure it is in the correct
position.
NOTE on Battery Disposal

The battery used in this device contains lithium. It may only be replaced by qualified personnel and disposed
of by authorized recycling companies.
Do not dispose of the battery in the regular household waste.
The national and international regulations must be observed when disposing of the battery.
Information on battery life can be found in chapter 14.1.5.
7.2 Assembly
7.2.1 General Assembly Notes

SICAM Q100 is designed for panel flush mounting.
WARNING
Do not touch any live parts.
Non-observance may lead to death or serious injury.
✧ After installation of the device and wiring, close the control cabinet.
• The installation site must be vibration-proof. The permitted ambient temperature must be observed (see
the technical data in chapter 14).
• Operating the device outside the permitted operating temperature range can lead to measuring errors and
device failure.
• The terminals are designed for wire cross-sections of 2.5 mm² max.
• The device must not be exposed to condensation during operation.
• Install the device in a location where it is not exposed to direct sunlight and strong temperature variations.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.2 Assembly
7.2.2 Environmental Protection Hints
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries (Applicable only for European Union and Countries with a Recycling
System)
The disposal of our products and possible recycling of their components after decommissioning has to be car-
ried out by an accredited recycling company, or the products/components must be taken to applicable collection
points. Such disposal activities must comply with all local laws, guidelines and environmental specifications of
the country in which the disposal is done. For the European Union the sustainable disposal of electronic scrap
is defined in the respective regulation for "waste electrical and electronic equipment" (WEEE).
The crossed-out wheelie bin on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents
means that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with nor-
mal household waste.
According to national legislation, penalties may be charged for incorrect disposal of

such waste.
By disposing of these products correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential neg-
ative effects on human health and the environment.
NOTE
Our products and batteries must not be disposed of as household waste. For disposing batteries it is necessary
to observe the local national/international directives.
Disposal of Mobile Storage Devices (for example USB Sticks and Memory Cards)
When disposing of/transferring mobile storage devices, using the format or delete functions only changes the
file management information and does not completely delete the data from your mobile storage device. When
disposing of or transferring a mobile storage device, Siemens strongly recommends physically destroying it or
completely deleting data from the mobile storage device by using a commercially available computer data eras-
ing software.
REACH/RoHS Declaration
You can find our current REACH/RoHS declarations at:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency/ecotransparency-down-
loads.html
NOTE
You can find more information about activities and programs to protect the climate at the EcoTransparency
website:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency.html

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.2 Assembly
7.2.3 Assembly
To install the device into a switch panel, proceed as follows:
✧ Push the device in installation position into the cut-out of the switch panel and hold the device tight.
✧ Attach one of the supplied mounting elements each on both sides of the housing.
Mounting plate
Mounting element
 1 mm (0.04 inch), steel
Figure 7-2 Stepwise Installation of the SICAM Q100 into a Switch Panel
✧ Swing the mounting element (provided with the device) over the rear cone.
✧ Move the mounting element to the position. Use a screw driver (0.6 mm x 4.5 mm) to fix the mounting
elements until the slipping clutch takes effect.
NOTE
The above mounting instructions must be performed correctly to provide sufficient protection against touching
live parts.
UL-Certification Conditions
Field Wires of Control Circuits shall be separated from other circuits with respect to the end-use requirements!

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.3 Electrical Connection
7.3.1 Safety Notes
DANGER
Hazard due to high voltage
Non-observance will lead to death or serious injury.
Work may only be carried out by trained personnel (see Preface) who are familiar with and observe the safety
requirements and precautions.
✧ Work may never be carried out if there is any hazardous voltage present.
✧ De-energize the device.
✧ Isolating device: Connect a suitable isolating device upstream to de-energize the device. The isolating
device must be installed near the device, it must be easily accessible to the user and it must be marked
as an isolating device for the device.
✧ Secure the supply voltage with an approved (UL/IEC) fuse: 1.6 A, type C.
✧ If a melting fuse is used, a suitable approved (UL/IEC) fuse holder has to be used.
NOTE
For electrical installations you have to observe and comply with the national and international provisions con-
cerning the installation of electric power installation and the low-voltage directive 2006/95/EG.
✧ Before commissioning the device, check that all connections are made properly.
✧ Connect the protective grounding terminal H to the protective conductor of the switch panel or of the
control cabinet.
✧ The secondary connections of interconnected current transformers must be short-circuited at these before
you disconnect the power supply leads to the device.
✧ Voltage measuring inputs: In the case of a direct connection and transformer connection, the device
has to be safeguarded with a listed 10 A backup fuse or a listed 10 A miniature circuit breaker. When
using voltage transformers, their secondary connections must never be short-circuited!
✧ Check the polarity and the phase assignment at the instrument transformers.
Siemens recommends leaving the device for a minimum of 2 hours in the operating room, before using it to
allow temperature equalization and to avoid dimness and condensation.
NOTE
Before you switch on the supply voltage, verify that the operational data match the rated data on the label and
the technical data according to chapter 14. This applies in particular to the supply voltage VH and to the
maximum values of alternating current and alternating voltage.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.3.2 Electrical Connection of SICAM Q100
Terminal connection
of the supply voltage
Figure 7-3 Terminal Connection of the Supply Voltage at the SICAM Q100
DANGER
Work may never be carried out if there is any hazardous voltage present.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.4 System Requirements
Connect the cables of the supply voltage on the terminal side of the device at terminal block H as follows:
Supply from the Alternating Voltage System
Terminal N/-: Neutral conductor of the supply voltage
Terminal L/+: Phase of the supply voltage
Terminal : Protective grounding terminal
Supply from a Direct Voltage Source
Terminal N/-: Negative supply voltage
Terminal L/+: Positive supply voltage
Terminal : Protective grounding terminal
NOTE
Always connect the grounding at the SICAM Q100 to the terminal for the protective conductor
(terminal block H).
Terminals
Terminals for supply voltage (H), inputs for current measurement (E), inputs for voltage measurement (F), bi-
nary inputs (U) and binary outputs (G) on the terminal side:
Conductor cross-section, rigid max. 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)
Conductor cross-section (conductor with ferrule) 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Conductor cross-section (conductor with ferrule, terminal F) 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)
Tightening torque 0.4 Nm to 0.5 Nm (3.5 in-lb to 4.5 in-lb)
RS485 interface (J) on the terminal side: RS485 cable with 9-pole D-sub socket
Ethernet interface (Z) on the top side: Ethernet patch cable or crossover cable
Voltage measuring inputs: In the case of a direct connection and transformer connection, the device has
to be safeguarded with a listed 10 A backup fuse or a listed 10 A miniature circuit breaker. When using voltage
transformers, their secondary connections must never be short-circuited!
7.4 System Requirements

To operate SICAM Q100 with a PC or notebook, the following system requirements must be met:
• PC or notebook with Intel processor (or compatible type); clock frequency min. 800 MHz
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional, Windows 7, and Windows 10 with Internet Explor-
er 9.0 (or higher) or Firefox
• Minimum 1 GB RAM primary storage
• VGA display 1024 x 768 with truecolor

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.5 Access Rights
7.5 Access Rights
Access Rights for Configuration and Maintenance
Access rights are determined by the role types configured in the 6.2.2 Configuration via User Interface 96. If
you are configured as a role of Administrator or User Account Manager, you will have the full access rights for
configuration, maintenance, updates.
Access Rights for Communication
The access rights for the communication via Ethernet with Modbus TCP protocol are made for port 502 and
for the user port. You can assign either full access rights or read-only authorization; chapter 9.3.7.2 describes
the settings.
You can also determine the access rights for serial communication using the Modbus RTU protocol. You can
assign either full access rights or read-only authorization; An internal indication Communication OK is avail-
able in the operational log, the LED assignment, or a binary output. This indication means the connection be-
tween the device and the MQTT broker is successfully established. It can be used as an input of a group
indication. 229 describes the settings.
No access rights are required when serial communicating via the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Communication via Ethernet with IEC 61850 server protocol and serial communication with
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol do not require any access rights.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.6 Meaning of the LEDs
7.6 Meaning of the LEDs

7KG95xx automatically monitors the functions of its hardware and software components. The LEDs on the top
side of the housing indicate the current device status.
RUN ERROR
H1 H2
Link/Activity
Speed
Figure 7-4 Designation of the LEDs
NOTE
LEDs are also located on the display side; their designations are RUN, ERROR, H1, and H2 and their functions
are the same as the functions of the LEDs on the top of the housing.
Depending on the status, the LEDs can be permanently on, flashing, or off. The states are described in chapter
12.3. The meaning of the LEDs during normal operation is explained in the following table:
Table 7-1 Meaning of the LEDs
LED Meaning
RUN Device active
ERROR Indicates an error according to parameterization
H1 According to parameterization
H2 According to parameterization
Link/Activity LED on: Ethernet link is up

LED flashing: Ethernet link is up and data are transferred
LED off: no Ethernet partners connected
Speed LED on: 100 Mbit/s

LED off: 10 Mbit/s

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.7 Commissioning
7.7 Commissioning
7.7.1 Initial Commissioning
DANGER
Work may never be carried out if there is any hazardous voltage present.
After you have inserted the battery, assembled the device and connected the supply voltage lines, you can start
the device for the first time. Proceed as follows:
✧ Check that the operational data match the rated data on the label and the technical data of the device (see
chapter 14). This applies in particular to the supply voltage and to the maximum values of alternating
current and alternating voltage.
NOTE
The wiring of the terminals described in the following depends on the type of measurement and analysis of the
measuring result. You only have to wire terminals needed for this purpose
✧ On the terminal side of the device connect the measuring lines linked with the measuring objects at the
terminal blocks E (current) and F (voltage); chapter 8 describes interfaces, connection principles, and
examples of connection possibilities.
✧ On the terminal side of the device, connect the process connections required for the measurements.
✧ For example, connect a cable to the systems control on the terminal side of the device at terminal block J
(for devices with RS485 interface).
✧ Connect the network cable to the PC at the RJ45 socket Z (Ethernet) on the top side of the housing or
connect the Y cable if you want to use the Ethernet switch.
✧ Close the door of the control cabinet to prevent touching live parts.
✧ Switch on the connected peripheral devices (PC, measuring device or modules) for measurand analysis.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.7 Commissioning
✧ Switch on the supply voltage of the device.
NOTE
The device does not have a power on/off switch. Switch the supply voltage on or off directly at the respective
supply cable.
After an operating time of approximately 15 minutes, the device will stay within the tolerances specified in
the technical data.
✧ Switch the alternating voltages and alternating currents to be measured at the measuring object on the
measuring lines.
✧ Carry out the measurements as described in chapter 9 or chapter 10.
7.7.2 Changes During Operation

The device is designed for permanent operation.
If you want to change the measurement setup, for example by connecting terminals so far unused, proceed
analogously to the Initial Commissioning.
NOTE
If you change the measurement setup, de-energize the supply voltage lines and all measuring lines before
opening the control cabinet. Note the warnings in chapter 7.7.1.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
7 Getting Started
7.7 Commissioning
7.7.3 Starting the Device with the Default IP Address

SICAM Q100 has the following internal default IP address: 192.168.0.55.
If you have entered a custom IP address during device configuration, you can temporarily activate the internal
default IP address of the device if necessary. Proceed as follows:
✧ Hold down the F4 softkey located in the right part of the display side of the device for at least 3 s.
Softkey F4
Default IP Address: 192.168.0.55

Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Figure 7-5 Location of the Softkey F4 for Activating the Default IP Address
When you press the softkey F4, SICAM Q100 will reset and use the default IP address until you have set
a new IP address or switched the device off and on again.
NOTE
Changing the IP address causes the device to reset and the LEDs signal (see chapter 13.2) that the device
was started with the default IP address.
In this case, the parameterized IP address and the default IP address are displayed on the Information tab,
Device information menu item (see chapter 9.2.7).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8 Connection Principle
8.1 Terminals 126
8.2 Communication Interfaces 128
8.3 Connection Types and Connection Examples 129

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8.1 Terminals
8.1 Terminals
The terminals on the terminal side of the device are designed as terminal blocks:
Figure 8-1 Terminal Blocks on the Terminal Side of the SICAM Q100
SICAM Q100 has the following terminal blocks:
Table 8-1 Terminal Blocks at SICAM Q100
Terminal Block Description
E 4 inputs for alternating current measurement
F 4 inputs for alternating voltage measurement
G 2 binary outputs
H Supply voltage
U 2 binary inputs

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8.1 Terminals
Functions of the Terminals at SICAM Q100
Table 8-2 Functions of the Terminals
Terminal Assigned Function, Description

Measured Value or
Indication
E: IAL1=> Ia Conductor a, input, current measurement
E: IAL1<= Ia Conductor a, output, current measurement
E: IBL2=> Ib Conductor b, input, current measurement
E: IBL2<= Ib Conductor b, output, current measurement
E: ICL3=> Ic Conductor c, input, current measurement
E: ICL3<= Ic Conductor c, output, current measurement
E: IN=> N Neutral conductor, input current measurement
E: IN<= N Neutral conductor, output, current measurement
F: AL1 Van Conductor a, voltage measurement
F: BL2 Vbn Conductor b, voltage measurement
F: CL3 Vcn Conductor c, voltage measurement
F: N N Neutral conductor, voltage measurement
G: 1 Binary output 1 Binary output 1
G: 2 Root Common root for both binary outputs
G: 3 Binary output 2 Binary output 2
H: Protective conductor -
H: N / - N/- Neutral conductor of the mains voltage or

negative supply voltage
H: L / + ph/+ Phase of the mains voltage or

positive supply voltage
U: 1 Binary input 1 Binary input 1
U: 2 Root Common root for both binary inputs
U: 3 Binary input 2 Binary input 2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8.2 Communication Interfaces
8.2 Communication Interfaces
8.2.1 Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet interface Z is located on the top side of the SICAM Q100. Data are exchanged via the
RJ45 Ethernet socket, see also detailed information in System Manual SICAM Q100 7KG95xx, order number
E50417-C1040-C482, chapter 2.
Ethernet socket
(RJ45)
Figure 8-2 Ethernet Interface Z (Detail of the Top Side)
NOTE
If you do not connect a cable to the RJ45 socket, Siemens recommends covering the socket with a cap or dum-
my plug (not included in the delivery) to prevent the contacts from becoming dirty.
If you use a Y cable and the internal Ethernet switch of the device, SICAM Q100 can be connected with a SI-
CAM I/O Unit. This device combination can be connected with the process control via the second connector of
the Y cable and an external Ethernet switch. For typical circuit diagrams, refer to the System Manual
SICAM Q100 7KG95xx, order no. E50417-C1000-C522, chapter 2.
8.2.2 RS485 Interface

The RS485 interface J (D-Sub) is located on the terminal side; see also detailed information in the System Man-
ual SICAM Q100 7KG95xx, order no. E50417-C1000-C522, chapter 2.
RS485 connector
(D-sub)
Figure 8-3 RS485 Interface J (Detail of the Terminal Side)
NOTE
If you do not connect a cable to the RS485 connector, Siemens recommends covering it with a cap (not includ-
ed in the delivery) to prevent the contacts from becoming dirty.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8.3 Connection Types and Connection Examples
8.3.1 Using SICAM Q100 in the Power Systems IT, TT, and TN
When using SICAM Q100 in the power systems IT, TT, and TN, no special operating conditions must be ob-
served.
8.3.2 Examples – Standard Application

The following input wiring diagrams are examples. Up to the maximum allowable current and voltage values
(see chapter 13.1) SICAM Q100 can also be connected without interconnected current and voltage transform-
ers.
Required voltage transformers can be operated in star connection or delta connection.
All input and output terminals that are not needed for measurements remain unwired.
NOTE
The illustration of the consistent ground connection of the instrument transformers is simplified in the following
connection examples. The secondary windings of the current transformers installed in a high-voltage power
system must be grounded on one side.
DANGER
Hazard due to high voltages in the event of a breakdown of the winding insulation
✧ Ground the secondary windings of the current transformers on one side. They are installed in a high-
voltage power system.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Example 1-phase System, No Voltage Transformer
Terminals SICAM Q100
S1 S2
PE 10 A
a
P1 P2
N
Figure 8-4 Example 1-phase System, No Voltage Transformer
Example 3-Wire Network, 2 Voltage Transformers and 1 Current Transformer, Balanced
PE
a b a b
A B A B
S1 S2 10 A 10 A 10 A
a
P1 P2
b
c
Figure 8-5 Example 3-Wire Network, 2 Voltage Transformers and 1 Current Transformer, Balanced
NOTICE
The secondary voltage on terminal F (voltage) must not exceed AC 600 V (AC 347 V for UL).
Non-observance can cause material damage.
✧ Make sure that the maximum permissible phase-to-ground voltage (PE) is not exceeded.
NOTE
The electrical connection PE-N is not mandatory.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Example 3-Wire Network, Direct Contact at Low-voltage Power System, 3 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
resp.
10 A
PE
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2
Figure 8-6 Example 3-Wire Network, No Voltage Transformer, 3 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
Example 3-Wire Network, No Voltage Transformer, 2 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
resp.
10 A
PE
S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
c
P1 P2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Example 3-Wire Network, 2 Voltage Transformers and 2 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
a b a b
PE
A B A B
10 A 10 A 10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b
P1 P2
c
Figure 8-8 Example 3-Wire Network, 2 Voltage Transformers and 2 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
NOTICE

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
a b a b
PE
A B A B
S1 S2 10 A 10 A 10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2
NOTICE

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Example 4-Wire Network, 1 Voltage Transformer and 1 Current Transformer, Balanced
a b
PE
A B
S1 S2 10 A
a
P1 P2
b
c
N
Figure 8-10 Example 4-Wire Network, 1 Voltage Transformer and 1 Current Transformer, Balanced
Example 4-Wire Network, No Voltage Transformer, 3 Current Transformers, Unbalanced
PE
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 je 10 A
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
a a a
b b b
B B B
PE
A A A
je 10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2
N
Example 4-Wire Network, 3 Voltage Transformers and 3 Current Transformers, Unbalanced, Current Transformer
at the Neutral Conductor
a a a
b b b
B B B
A A A
PE
je 10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2
N
P1 P2
Figure 8-13 Example 4-Wire Network, 3 Voltage Transformers and 3 Current Transformers, Unbalanced,
Current Transformer at the Neutral Conductor

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
8.3.3 Example - Special Application
a a a
b b b
B B B
PE
A A A
resp.
10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9 Operation at Use of a PC
9.1 General Usage Notes 138
9.2 Start and Design of the User Interface 139
9.3 Configuration of the Device 150
9.4 Value View and Evaluation 260
9.5 Maintenance 301
9.7 Example of a Parameterization and Measured Value Evaluation 328
9.8 Flowchart of Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway Parameterization 336

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.1 General Usage Notes
9.1 General Usage Notes

SICAM Q100 can be operated with HTML pages via the connected PC. Additionally, limited operation of the
device is possible with softkeys on the display side in connection with the display. This chapter describes the
PC-based operation; chapter 10 covers the operation using the softkeys.
The graphical user interface is stored in the device. To display the user interface, start Microsoft Internet
Explorer 6.0 (or higher) and enter the IP address of the device.
You can navigate through Microsoft Internet Explorer using the icons on the toolbar, for example back, forward,
print. The user interface itself does not contain any navigation icons.
Operating actions are performed with the mouse. Parameters and text are entered using the keyboard.
The following table lists the control elements.
Table 9-1 Control Functions
Control Element Control Function
Option button: selects one option
List box: selects an item from a list
Button: Executing an action by clicking the button, that is the

current settings on the user interface are transmitted to the
device.
Active tab (light blue)
Inactive tab (dark blue)
Selects and opens the item to be activated,

for example a tab
NOTE
At the beginning of the parameterization, first set the Network type according to chapter 9.3.3. If you change
the Network type during operation, check all settings, measured values, and limiting values for inconsistencies
after activating the device. Check also the ICD file which is suitable for the network type. If there are invalid
values or a wrong ICD file, restart the device.
NOTE
If you change settings in tabs, click Send on each tab to confirm the new setting. The settings are activated
only after the entire parameterization has been completed.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.2 Start and Design of the User Interface
9.2.1 Initial Start of the Operation

Before starting the user interface, the following preconditions must be satisfied:
✧ Assemble the SICAM Q100 as described in chapter 7.2.
✧ Connect the lines for measurement, communication and supply voltage as described in chapter 7.3 and
observe the safety provisions.
✧ Switch on the devices needed for the measurement.
✧ Switch on the supply voltage of the SICAM Q100.
✧ Check whether the LEDs at the SICAM Q100 indicate that the device is ready (see chapter 13.2).
✧ Match the IP address and the subnet mask of the network interface card of your computer to the device
settings.
✧ Check on the computer screen whether the LAN connection is up. Activate the LAN connection if it is down
(see the Windows manual or the Windows online help for information).
✧ For checking purposes, carry out the ping test as follows (example for Windows):
 Click Start on the Windows interface.
 Select Execute....
 Enter cmd in the dialog and click OK.
 Enter: ping 192.168.0.55.
 Press ENTER.
 Check the following output in the window.
Figure 9-1 Ping Test
✧ Start the Web browser.
✧ Enter the IP address in the Web browser (for example default IP address: https://192.168.0.55) of
SICAM Q100 and press ENTER.
The user interface opens with the Information tab → Show device information (see Figure 9-8).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
NOTE
When starting the device for the first time, a set of parameters with factory settings is loaded. You can modify
these settings during the parameterization (see chapter 9.3).
To set a different user language for the user interface, open the Administrative menu on the Configure tab,
select the Device and language menu item and change the language as described in chapter 9.3.7.7.
NOTE
If the user interface does not open or the opened user interface does not show an interface as given in Figure
8-3, the reason could be that JavaScript is missing or has not been activated. The operation of user interface
requires JavaScript. You may have to activate JavaScript as described in the following chapter.
9.2.2 Enabling JavaScript

The operation of the user interface requires JavaScript.
Enable JavaScript as follows:
✧ Start the Web browser (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer).
✧ Select the Tools menu on the menu bar of the Web browser.
✧ Select Internet options.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the Internet options dialog, open the Security tab.
Figure 9-2 Enabling JavaScript
✧ In the window of the Security tab, select the Internet icon.
✧ On the Security tab, scroll to Medium-high by moving the scroll bar with your mouse. Alternatively, if
there is no scroll bar, click Default Level and set the scroll bar that appears to Medium-high.
✧ Click Apply.
✧ Click OK.
9.2.3 Changing the Buffer Mechanism (only for Microsoft Internet Explorer)
NOTE
Only Microsoft Internet Explorer supports the SIGRAPlugin. Other Web browsers, for example Firefox, do not
support the SIGRAPlugin.
The operation of the user interface requires the SIGRA Plugin.
Change the buffer mechanism as follows:
✧ Start Microsoft Internet Explorer.
✧ Select the Tools menu in the menu bar of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
✧ Select Internet options from the Tools menu.
✧ In the Internet options dialog, open the General tab.
✧ In the window of the General tab, select the Settings icon.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Figure 9-3 Changing the Buffer Mechanism
✧ In the Website Data Settings tab, click the Every time I visit the webpage icon.
✧ Click OK.
9.2.4 Changing the Security Setting (only for Microsoft Internet Explorer)
NOTE
With Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 10.0 or higher, the operation is mandatory if multiple file download
is required in chapter 9.4.2.5.
Change the security setting as follows:
✧ Start Microsoft Internet Explorer.
✧ Select the Tools menu in the menu bar of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
✧ Click Internet Options.
✧ Select the Security tab.
✧ Click Custom level.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Figure 9-4 Changing Security Setting
✧ Navigate to Miscellaneous, then to Access data sources across domains. Select Enable.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Figure 9-5 Changing Security Setting - Trusted Sites Zone
✧ Navigate to ActiveX controls and plug-ins, then to Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe
for scripting. Select Enable.
✧ Click OK.
NOTE
If the Windows system is reinstalled, you must reconfigure the settings related to the Internet Explorer.
9.2.5 Number of Connections via HTML

A maximum of 2 connections is possible via HTML.
9.2.6 Layout of the User Interface

The user interface has the following layout:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Address bar Microsoft Internet Explorer
Online help Tab Menu bar Toolbar Navigation bar
Navigation window Element Menu Input/output window Status bar
Figure 9-6 Designations in the User Interface

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.2.7 Starting the User Interface during Operation
Starting the User Interface
To start the user interface, proceed as follows:
✧ Start the Web browser.
✧ Enter the IP address in Microsoft Internet Explorer (for example the default IP address: 192.168.0.55) of
SICAM Q100 and press ENTER.
The user interface opens with the Log on tab.
✧ Enter the User name and Password, and click Log on.
Figure 9-7 Log on via the User Interface
The user interface opens with the Information → Show device information (Figure 9-8).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Information Tab
Figure 9-8 Information Tab, Show Device Information Input/Output Window
You can click the logout icon (see red marking in the figure) to log out, and the logon page will appear.
NOTE
Without user interactions the Web UI will be accessible for 10 minutes (default). You can configure this
time-out.
Navigation Window of the Information Tab
The navigation window of the Information tab contains the element Show device information and the
Message Logs menu with the element Operational log.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.2.7.1 Show Device Information

✧ Click the Show device information item in the navigation window.
The Show device information input/output window shows the following information (9-8):
 Device information
Information about the device and the installed software
 Communication
Information about the data transmission between device and periphery
If you click the License information, you can see the OSS_Readme.
 Device date and time

Information about the time settings of the device
 Parameter set
Information about the active and passive set of parameters

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.2.7.2 Message Logs Menu

The Message Logs menu contains operational logs registered and saved by the device during operation. The
device can save up to 128 operational logs. When the storage capacity is exceeded, the oldest indications are
overwritten successively.
Operational Log
To show the operational indications, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Message Logs menu and then the Operational log menu item.
The operational indications are listed in the input/output window as follows:
Figure 9-9 Information Tab, Operational Log
 Serial No.
 Date of registration
 Time of registration
 Information on the indication
 Value of the indication (On, Off or Invalid)
 Cause source of the indication (for example Internal, Browser)
NOTE
The chapter 9.5.4.1 explains how to delete the operational indications manually.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3 Configuration of the Device
NOTE
The device contains two sets of parameters. The set of parameters currently used for device operations is the
active set of parameters. The inactive set of parameters is called the passive set of parameters.
The following sections describe how to change and enable the passive set of parameters.
9.3.1 Device Configuration Procedure

If you have not changed the set of parameters since the first start of the device (see chapter 9.2.1), use the
factory settings (see chapter 9.3.3 to chapter 9.3.7). To change the settings of the set of parameters, proceed
as follows:
✧ Click the Configure tab on the user interface.
Figure 9-10 Configure Tab
✧ Select the Prepare menu in the navigation window and then either Get device configuration or Open
configuration from file.
NOTE
If you have selected Get device configuration, an editable copy of the active parameter set of the device is
displayed on the screen. In the meantime, the active parameter set in the device continues to operate.
If you have selected Open configuration from file, you can open and enable or edit the copy of a parameter
set that was already created and saved to a folder.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.1.1 Get Device Configuration

If you have selected Get device configuration in the Configure tab, you can open and edit either the Get
active configuration or the Get default configuration in the input/output window. Proceed as follows:
Figure 9-11 Configure Tab, Get Device Configuration
Get Active Configuration and Editing
✧ Click Get active configuration.

A copy of the active set of parameters (= passive set of parameters) of the device is opened for editing.
✧ Check and, if necessary, change the set parameters by opening the desired menus in the navigation
window:
 Operational parameters menu according to chapter 9.3.3
 HMI settings according to chapter 9.3.4
 Recording and reporting according to chapter 9.3.5.3
 Administrative menu according to chapter 9.3.7.
✧ Activate the modified configuration as described in chapter 9.3.1.3.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Get Default Configuration and Editing
✧ Click Get default configuration.

A copy of the factory settings (= passive set of parameters) of the device is opened for editing.
NOTE
You can edit the displayed factory settings, activate and use them as active set of parameters. The original
factory settings are not overwritten and can be used at anytime.
✧ Activate the modified configuration as described in chapter 9.3.1.3.
9.3.1.2 Open Configuration from File

If you have selected Open configuration from file in the Configure tab, you can open an already existing file
in a folder. Proceed as follows:
Figure 9-12 Configure Tab, Open Configuration from File
✧ Click Browse....

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The Choose file dialog opens.
Figure 9-13 Choose File
✧ Select the desired file (extension .cfg) in the directory.
NOTE
You can open only files with the following properties of the file name:
• Maximum 8 characters and extension (.cfg)
• Only containing:
 Letters: a to z, A to Z
 Numbers: 0 to 9
 Hyphen (-) and underline (_)
✧ Click Open.
The selected path is inserted into the Browse field in the input/output window, Figure 9-12.
✧ Click Open.
The device configuration from the CFG file is loaded.
NOTE
If you have activated the option in your web browser to transfer the local directory name together with the file
name when uploading files, then the total number of characters in the directory and file names may not exceed
100 English characters. Otherwise, the .cfg file in your device will not be updated.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.1.3 Finish Configuration

When you have changed the configuration, you must either enable it as the active set of parameters or save it.
Activating the Set of Parameters
To activate the set of parameters, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Finish configuration menu and click Activation.
Figure 9-14 Configure Tab, Activation Input/Output Window
✧ Click Activation.
At first the message Parameter activation is still in progress will be shown and then the message
Parameter activation is complete in the input/output window.
The modified set of parameters is loaded as the active set of parameters into the device and the new
parameters take effect immediately.
NOTE
The active and passive set of parameters are listed in the Activation input/output window in the Set column
for your information.
NOTE
During the parameter activation, the device is working under special mode. If one kind of recorders happens in
this duration, the integrity of the recorded data cannot be guaranteed.
Save Configuration to File
You can save both the active and the passive configuration to a file. Proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the navigation window, select the Finish configuration menu and click Save Configuration to File.
Figure 9-15 Configure Tab, Save Configuration to File Input/Output Window
✧ Click either Save active configuration or Save passive configuration.

The File Download dialog opens.
Figure 9-16 File Download Dialog
✧ Click Save.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The Save As dialog opens.
Figure 9-17 Save As Dialog
✧ Select the file path in the Save in: list box.
✧ Use the file name suggested in the File name: list box or enter a new file name with the file
extension *.CFG.
NOTE
The length of file names must not exceed 8 characters. Use only characters according to NOTE in chapter
9.3.1.2.
✧ Click Save.
The Download complete dialog opens.
✧ In the Download complete dialog, click Close.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Cancel
To cancel the configuration, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Finish configuration menu and click Cancel.
Figure 9-18 Configure Tab, Cancel Input/Output Window
✧ Click Cancel in the input/output window.
NOTE
After clicking Cancel, the active set of parameters is copied into the passive set of parameters. This action is
the same as Get device configuration → Get active configuration described in chapter 9.3.1.1.
After you have clicked Cancel, the parameterization is released and can be run from a different computer if
necessary.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.2 Access to the Passive Set of Parameters by Multiple Users
Reading the Passive Set of Parameters
The user interface allows the simultaneous read access of up to 2 users to the passive set of parameters.
Editing the Passive Set of Parameters
The passive set of parameters can only be edited from one user even though multiple users have simultaneous
read access.
Once a user changes a parameter on the user interface, the write access is denied for all other users.
If the write access is blocked, modified in brackets will be displayed in the upper right corner of the user
interface. The user making the changes will see modified without brackets.
Figure 9-19 Access Blocked
If a user makes a change, the server starts a 20-minute timer. If no further changes to the set of parameters
are entered by the time the timer has counted down, write access is released again for all users. In this case,
the modified data are discarded and the passive set of parameters is overwritten with the content of the active
set of parameters.
If new changes to the passive parameter set are made during the 20-minute countdown, the timer is restarted
by each action.
If the user has completed the changes to the passive set of parameters or finished the parameterization by
clicking Cancel, write access for all users is also released.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3 Setting the Operational Parameters

In the Configure tab you can view and edit the set operational parameters. You can select the parameters in
the Operational menu in the navigation window. The submenus Process connections, Select automation
function, HMI, PQ Management and Administrative are available for making the settings. The submenus
contain the following elements:
• Process connections
 AC measurement
 Binary inputs
 Binary outputs
 LEDs
• Select automation functions
 Limits 1-8
 Limits 9-16
 Group indications 1-4
NOTE
Observe the procedure for the device configuration described in chapter 9.3.1 when you set the operational
parameters.
NOTE
If you change the Network type during ongoing operation, check the settings, measured values, and limiting
values for inconsistencies. Check also the ICD file which is suitable for the network type. If there are any invalid
measured values and limiting values or a wrong ICD file, restart the device.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3.1 Process Connections

9.3.3.1.1 AC Measurement
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of Measured-Value Acquisition
NOTE
Pay careful attention to the values you configure to ensure that they do not contradict each other.
Table 9-2 Settings for Measured-Value Acquisition

Rated frequency 50 Hz Setting 50 Hz: 50 Hz ±7.5 Hz
Setting 60 Hz: 60 Hz ±9 Hz
Network type 1) Four-wire, Acc. to list box
three-phase, unbalanced
(see chapter 16)
2)
Power quality values for Phase to neutral Phase to neutral
Phase to phase
Nominal/Declared supply AC 230.00 V AC 57.73 V to 400 V (autorange)
voltage 1)  IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to
AC 230 V: 200 % overvoltage
 > AC 230 V to 400 V: 200 % to
15 % overvoltage
UL conditions:
 > AC 170 V to 300 V: 200 % to
15 % overvoltage
Voltage transformer no no
yes
Primary rated voltage AC 10 000.00 V AC 100.00 V to 1 000 000.00 V
Secondary rated voltage AC 100.00 V AC 1.00 V to 460.00 V
Current transformer no no
yes
Primary rated current AC 1000.00 A AC 1.00 A to 100 000.00 A
Secondary rated current AC 1.00 A AC 1.00 A to 10.00 A
Transformer ratio In3) no no
yes
Primary rated current In AC 1000.00 A AC 1.00 A to 100 000.00 A
Zero-point suppression 4) 0.3 % (from Unom, Irated) 0.0 % to 10.0 %
Voltage harmonic unit % %
V
Measurement aggregation 5) -none- -none-
150/180-cycle interval
1)
In the case of contradictory parameter settings, Primary nominal voltage is indicated as faulty (red) and
Network type as not adjustable (gray). Moreover, the Send button is disabled.
2)
The parameter Power quality values for is available only if the following Network type is selected: Four-
wire, three-phase, unbalanced.
3)
The parameter Transformer ratio In is available only if the following Network type is selected: Four-
wire, three-phase, unbalanced.
4)
Voltage and current values smaller than/equal to the setting referred to 100 % are not included in the
calculation and display.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
5)
You can select none/150-cycle interval on 50 Hz or none/180-cycle interval on 60 Hz. If none is selected,
the value will be updated every 10/12 cycles If 150-cycle interval or 180-cycle interval is selected, the
value will be updated every 3 s.
NOTE
If you change one of the following parameters, the device restarts:
• Rated frequency
• Network type
Parameterization of the Measured-Value Acquisition
To change the parameters of the measured-value acquisition, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Operational parameters menu, then the Process connections
submenu and click AC measurement.
Figure 9-20 Configure Tab, AC Measurement Input/Output Window
✧ Enter the desired values in the fields and select the parameters in the list boxes and option fields as
described in Table 9-2.
✧ If you are not using a voltage transformer and/or current transformer between the measurement object
and SICAM Q100, click no in the respective option field. The associated fields for primary and secondary
values are hidden in this case.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Aggregation Time (User interface: Average interval)
It is also necessary to set or to change the aggregation time, see chapter 9.3.6.3 (Table 9-16, Average interval).
For example, if you want to determine the prevailing phase angles and the prevailing ratio, change the
aggregation time (Average interval).
NOTE
The aggregation time defines the time for the update of the prevailing phase angle.
If you change the aggregation time, the time is also changed for other measurements.
NOTE
If Ethernet communication with Bus protocol IEC 61850 is active (see chapter 9.3.7.2) and you change
Network type, the device will restart.
✧ After the parameterization click Send.

The parameters are transmitted to the device but not enabled yet (passive set of parameters).
✧ If you do not want to make any additional settings, continue with the Activation of the device configuration
according to section Activating the Set of Parameters. If you want to change other settings, enter the
changes and then enable the device configuration as described in section Activating the Set of
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3.1.2 Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2
Table 9-3 Settings for Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2
Threshold voltage
Threshold voltage 19 V 19 V
(one setting for both binary inputs) 88 V
176 V
Binary inputs
Terminals U1/2
Routed as: 1) Status information Status information

Load profile source
Tariff source
Software filter time 1 (* 2 ms) 2 ms to 120 000 ms

(only settable if Routed as: Status information (settable in 2-ms increments)
has been set)
Source inverted no no
yes
Add entry to operational log yes no

(only settable if Routed as: Status information yes
has been set)
Binary input indication Binary Input 1 Any

Max. 31 characters 2)
Terminals U3/2

Load profile source
Tariff source

has been set)
yes

has been set)


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
1)
see following note:
NOTE
The parameter cannot be changed in this field. In the Configuration tab, menu Energy management, the
Load profile source or Tariff source is selected. If you did not select a source, Status information is auto-
matically selected.
2) 31 bytes of UTF-8

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2
If you want to change the parameters for the binary inputs, please proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Operational parameters menu, then the Process connection
submenu, and click the element Binary inputs.
Figure 9-21 Configure Tab, Binary Inputs Input/Output Window
✧ Change the Parameters and the Binary input indication according to Table 9-3.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3.1.3 Binary Outputs G1/G2 and G3/G2
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Binary Outputs G1/G2 and G3/G2
Table 9-4 Settings of Binary Outputs G1/G2 and G3/G2
Source type Indication Indication

Energy counter
Source Type Indication
Indication -none- Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
yes
Operating mode Persistent Persistent

Persistent with fail safe
Pulse
Pulse with retrigger
Output time for pulse operating mode 20 (* 10 ms) 50 ms to 3 600 000 ms

(setting only possible if operating
modes Pulse and Pulse with retrig-
ger)
Source Type Energy Counter
Energy counter -none- Acc. to list box
(see 16 Operating Parameters 397)
Energy increase per pulse 1.0 Wh 0.1 Wh/VAh/varh to 1 000 000 Wh/VAh/
varh
Output time for pulse operating mode 20 (* 10 ms) 50 ms to 3 600 000 ms

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterization of the Binary Outputs G1/G2 and G3/G2
To change the outputs of a binary output, proceed as follows:
submenu and click Binary outputs.
Figure 9-22 Configure Tab, Binary Outputs Input/Output Window
NOTE
The parameterization of both binary outputs is identical. Figure 9-22 depicts binary output Terminal G1/G2 as
output for indications and binary output Terminal G3/G2 as energy counter.
You can only set either an indication or an energy counter for a binary output.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing an Indication
✧ Select the desired parameters for an indication in the list boxes and option fields (see Figure 9-22,
example terminal G1/G2) as described in Table 9-4.
NOTE
If you select -not assigned- as the source of an indication and/or energy counter, the corresponding binary
output is inactive.
✧ You can select the following output types in the Operating mode list box:
 Persistent: The binary output has the status ON or OFF. If the indication becomes invalid, the binary
output continues to maintain its current status.
Indication
Indication ON
invalid invalid
OFF
Output
Binary output ON
not inverted
OFF
Binary output ON
inverted
OFF Output
Figure 9-23 Persistent
 Persistent with fail save: If the indication becomes invalid, the binary output switches into the OFF
state, that is if Source inverted = no, or it switches into the ON state if Source inverted = yes.
Indication
Indication ON
invalid invalid
OFF
Output
Binary output ON
not inverted
OFF
Binary output ON
inverted
OFF Output
Figure 9-24 Persistent with Fail Save
 Pulse without retrigger: This indication is output as pulse. If the indication changes again while the
output pulse is ON, the pulse output time is not restarted. This means that a change of the indication
during the pulse output will be ignored.
Indication Indication Indication

Indication ON
OFF
Output Output Output

Binary output with ON
Source inverted = no OFF
Output time
Output Output Output

Source inverted = yes OFF
Output time
Figure 9-25 Pulse without Retrigger

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
 Pulse with retrigger: This indication is output as pulse. The output pulse is retriggered if the
indication is changed during the pulse output. This means that the pulse output is extended.
Indication Indication Indication Indication

ON
Indication
OFF
Output Output with retrigger Output

Source inverted = no OFF
Output time Extended output time
Output with
Output retrigger Output
Source inverted = yes OFF
Output time Extended output time
Figure 9-26 Pulse with Retrigger
✧ If you have selected one of the two Pulse types in the Operating mode list box, enter an output time x
(in x *10 ms) into the Output time for pulse operating mode field.
Behavior when Activating the Set of Parameters after the Set of Parameters was Changed
 Persistent
The binary output is set to the new status (ON or OFF) as defined by the current indication.
 Pulse
If the binary output is ON in pulse mode while activating the parameter set, the binary output is
immediately switched to OFF after the parameter set has been activated. This happens even if the
parameterized Output time for pulse operating mode has not yet elapsed.

✧ If you do not want to make any additional settings, continue with the activation of the device configuration
Parameters.
Parameterizing an Energy Counter (see Figure 9-22, for example terminal G1/G2)
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields and select the parameter in the list box as described in Table 9-4.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3.1.4 LEDs
Default Settings and Setting Options of the LEDs
Table 9-5 LED Settings
LED Default Setting Setting Options
RUN Device ready Not settable
H1 -none- Acc. to list box
H2 (see chapter 16)
ERROR -none- Errors are signaled as parameterized (only

error indications can be parameterized).
Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
Indication inverted no no
yes
Parameterization of the LEDs
To change the outputs of the LEDs H1, H2, and ERROR, proceed as follows:
submenu and click LEDs.
Figure 9-27 Configure Tab, LEDs Input/Output Window

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Select the desired parameters in the list boxes and option fields as described in Table 9-5.
NOTE
Select Indication -none- to disable the corresponding LED.

Parameters.
Behavior of the LEDs
Indication
Indication H
invalid invalid
L
LED ON
flash flash
OFF
Figure 9-28 Behavior of the LEDs

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.3.2 Automation Functions
9.3.3.2.1 Limit Settings
In the Select automation functions menu you can set upper or lower limits for up to 16 measured values. Limit
violations of the upper or lower value range can be output as indications. Limiting value violations can be
signaled at the device via the 2 binary outputs and the LEDs H1 and H2. Furthermore, all 16 limit violations can
be sent to peripheral devices via the communication interfaces.
The programmable limits are divided into two groups Limits 1-8 and Limits 9-16. The parameterization is
identical for all limits.
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Limits
Table 9-6 Limit Settings
Measurement -none- Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
Limit 0.00 -1 000 000 000.00 to 1 000 000 000.00
Limit type Lower Lower

Upper
Hysteresis (%) 1.00 0.00 to 10.00
Violation indication Limit Violation x Any

(x = 1 to 16) Max. 31 characters 1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing a Limit
To change, for example, limit 1, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Operational parameters menu, then the Select automation
functions submenu and click Limits 1-8.
Figure 9-29 Configure Tab, Limits 1-8 Input/Output Window (Detail)
✧ Enter the desired values in the fields and select the parameters in the list boxes and option fields as
Hysteresis of the Limit Value Violation

100 %
Limit Max
Permissible
range Hysteresis range
Limit Min
0%
t
Start End Start End
Figure 9-30 Hysteresis (General Representation)
NOTE
Select Measurement -none- to disable the corresponding limit indication.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
NOTE
Which quantities are offered in the Measurement list box depends on the configured network type. The
Network type is specified in the Process connections submenu, AC measurement input/output window, see
chapter 9.3.3.1.1.

Parameters.
9.3.3.2.2 Group Indications
In the Select automation functions menu, up to 4 Group indications can be parameterized and each of them
can be assigned up to 4 logically linked single-point indications. The single-point indications can be inverted.
Default Settings and Setting of the Group Indications
Table 9-7 Group Indications
Source -none- Acc. to list box

(see chapter 16)
yes
Logic operation NONE NONE

OR
AND
Group indication name Group Indication x Any

1)
31 bytes of UTF-8

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Rule for Linking Indications to a Group Indication
In a group indication, up to 4 indications can sequentially be linked logically. The indications 1 to 4 are always
linked successively as follows:
Indication 1 with Indication 2 = Indication 1/2
Indication 1/2 with Indication 3 = Indication 1/2/3
Indication 1/2/3 with Indication 4 = Group indication
AND
OR
INV
AND Group Indication 1
Figure 9-31 Example: Linking 4 Indications to a Group Indication
INV
AND Group Indication 1
Figure 9-32 Example: Linking 2 Indications to a Group Indication

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing a Group Indication
To change, for example, group indication 1, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Operational parameters menu, then the Select automation
functions submenu and click Group indications 1-4.
Figure 9-33 Configure Tab, Group Indications Input/Output Window (Detail)
NOTE
Sources are assigned inside a group indication sequentially from source 1 to source 4.
If you select -none- at the 1st source in a group indication, you cannot configure further sources in this group
indication. In this case, the group indication is inactive.
You can also integrate group indications into subordinated group indications, for example group indication 1 in
group indication 3.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.4 HMI
In the Configure tab, you can view and, if necessary, edit the display settings. You can select these parameters
in the HMI menu in the navigation window. The menu contains the following elements:
• Display settings
• User-defined screen
9.3.4.1 Display Settings
Default Settings and Setting Ranges
Table 9-8 Display Settings
Contrast 8 0 to 10
Time until dimmed 10 1 min to 99 min
Refresh time 1 000 330 ms to 3 000 ms
Inverse display no no
yes
Phase label (L1,L2,L3) (L1,L2,L3)

(a,b,c)
Parameterizing the Display Settings
To change the properties of the display, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the HMI menu and click Display settings.
Figure 9-34 Configure Tab, Display Settings Input/Output Window
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields and select the corresponding parameters in the option fields as


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.
9.3.4.2 User-Defined Screens

In the User-defined screen menu you can parameterize up to 4 different User screens. Each Screen type
allows you to select whether to display the measured values numerically (2 or 4 measured values) or
graphically and numerically (2 or 3 measured values). To select which of the 4 screens are presently displayed
on the device, you must use the device softkeys and the HTML page.
Table 9-9 Settings of User Screens
Screen type -none- 1) -none-

2 measured values, numerical
2 measured values, graphical + numerical
Screen name USER_SCREEN_x Max. 18 characters

(x = 1 to 4) Only English and German letters,
numbers, and special characters are
permitted.
2 measured values, numerical -none- Acc. to list box

Display 1, numerical
(see chapter 16)
4 measured values, numerical -none- Acc. to list box

(see chapter 16)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-9 Settings of User Screens
2 measured values, graphical -none- Acc. to list box

and numerical
(see chapter 16)
Display 1, graph./num.
3 measured values, graphical -none- Acc. to list box

and numerical
(see chapter 16)
Display x, graph./num.
(x = 1 to 3)
Min value 0.0 The minimum value and maximum value
Max value 10.0 are defined by the selected parameters
(unit according to (see chapter 9.3.3.1.1).
measured value)
1)
If you have not made any selection, the displays explained in the following do not exist.
Parameterizing the User-Defined Screens
To change the User define screens, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the HMI menu and click User Define Screen.
Figure 9-35 Configure Tab, User Define Screen Input/Output Window
✧ Select the respective parameters in the list boxes according to Table 9-9.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.5 Energy Management
9.3.5.1 Load Profile
Table 9-10 Load Profile
Subperiode time 15 minutes 1 min to 6 min in 1-min steps, 10 min, 12 min,

15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min
Number of subperiods1) 1 1 to 5
Synchronization source Internal clock None

Protocol
Binary input 1
Binary input 2
Internal clock
Kind of used reactive power Q1 Q12)

Qn
Qtot
1) Number = 1: Fixed Block method: The lengths of the subperiod and of the measuring period are identical.
Number = 2 to 5: Rolling Block method
Length of the subperiod: The length of the subperiod is an integer part of a full hour.
Length of measuring period: The length of the measuring period cannot be configured directly. It is defined
as the product of the length of the subperiod and the number of subperiods:
Length of measuring period = n x length of subperiod; n = number of subperiods
2) Under 3-wire Network (Delta), the selection of Q1 should not be used.
Parameterizing the Load Profile
To change the Load profile settings, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the navigation window of the Energy management menu click Load profile.
Figure 9-36 Configure Tab, Load Profile Input/Output Window
NOTE
Changing the number and length of the subperiods deletes the load-profile buffer.
NOTE
If a binary input is used as synchronization source its properties must be configured (see 9.3.3.1.2 Binary In-
puts U1/U2 and U3/U2 163 Configure → Operational parameters → Process connections → Binary in-
puts).

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.5.2 Tariffs (TOU)
Table 9-11 Tariffs (TOU)
Synchronization source Protocol Protocol1)

Binary input 12)
Binary input 22)
Calendar
The following parameters are available only when Synchronization source is set to Calendar.
Season 1 Start 01-01 01-01 to 12-31
Season 1 End 06-30 01-01 to 12-31
Season 2 Start 07-01 Not settable

The rest days of the full year
Season 2 End 12-31
Weekend Setting Thursday and Friday Sunday to Saturday, max. 2 days
Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff 00:00 00:00 to 23:45

y (y = 1 to 8) Period 1 Start

y (y = 1 to 8) Period 1 End


Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff No 3) Yes

y (y = 1 to 8) Period 1 Active No
Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff No Yes

Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff Every Day Every Day

y (y = 1 to 8) Workday/ Workday
Weekend Selection Weekend
Coverage Check Pass
Fail (with gap)
Fail (with overlap)
1)In this case, the protocol Modbus TCP can control tariff 1 to tariff 8. Refer to the System Manual SICAM
Q100, chapter 2.2.7.18 Register 0154: Tariffs (read and write), order number E50417-C1040-C522.
2)
This synchronization source can only control tariff 1 or tariff 2.
3)
The default settings of Tariff 1 Period 1 Active for 2 seasons are checked.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Tariffs
To change the tariff setting, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window of the Energy management menu click Tariffs (TOU).
Figure 9-37 Configure Tab, Tariffs (TOU) Input/Output Window

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Select the parameter in the list box according to Table 9-11.

When Synchronization source is set to Calendar:
 If the coverage check passes, all the coverage check bars show in green, see Figure 9-38.
 If the coverage check fails, the coverage check bars show in other colors, see Figure 9-39. The button
Send is disabled. You must reconfigure the parameters.
Figure 9-38 Configure Tab, Synchronization Source: Calendar

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Figure 9-39 Configure Tab, Synchronization Source: Calendar, Fail with Gap or Overlap

The parameter is transmitted to the device but not enabled yet (passive parameter set).
Parameters.
NOTE
If you change the setting value of the parameter Synchronization source from Protocol to Binary input, you
must reselect the tariff. Otherwise, the value will be cumulated in the previous tariff.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.5.3 Energy Upper Limit
Table 9-12 Energy Upper Limit
Energy Upper Limit Energy Counter Energy Counter

Energy Value
You can select the energy counter or the energy value as the energy upper limit in Configure → Energy
management → Energy Upper Limit.
Figure 9-40 Configure Tab, Energy Upper Limit

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.5.4 Energy Freeze and Reset
Table 9-13 Energy Freeze and Reset
Interval 10 minutes 10 minutes

15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
The SICAM Q100 device supports the freeze energy counter via IEC 61850. You can set the Interval in
Configure → Energy management → Energy freeze and reset to define the interval of freezing period.
Figure 9-41 Configure Tab, Energy Freeze and Reset

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6 Recording and Reporting

In the Configure tab, you can view and, if necessary, edit the settings for recording and reports. You can select
these parameters in the Recording and reporting menu in the navigation window. The menu contains the fol-
lowing elements:
• Event recorder
• Trigger management
• Recorder parameters
• Mains signaling voltage
• Memory management
• Report configuration
• Recording parameters
• Transient detection
9.3.6.1 Event Recorder
Table 9-14 Event Recorder
Voltage event
Swell threshold 110 % 105 % to 140 % in 5-% steps
Dip threshold 90 % 75 % to 95 % in 5-% steps
Interruption threshold 5% 1 %, 2 %, 3 %, 5 %, 8 % 10 %
Hysteresis 2% 1 % to 6 % in 1-% steps
Event detection mode1) ph-N ph-N

ph-ph
RVC event
RVC threshold 6% 1 % to 6 % in 1-% steps
RVC hysteresis 2) 3% 0.5 % to 3 % in 0.5-% steps
RVC event detection mode 3) ph-N ph-N

ph-ph
Frequency event
Underfrequency threshold 1% 0.1 % to 1.0 % in 0.1-% steps and

1.0 % to 5.0 % in 1.0-%-steps

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-14 Event Recorder
Overfrequency threshold 1% 0.1 % to 1.0 % in 0.1-% steps and

1.0 % to 5.0 % in 1.0-%-steps
Voltage-unbalance event
Voltage-unbalance threshold 5% 1 % to 5 % in 1-% steps
1) Only for 3P4W(3 phases/4 wires) unbalanced network type, you can select ph-N or ph-ph option as the
event trigger condition.
2) According to IEC61000-4-30 Ed.3, RVC hysteresis is recommended to be half of the threshold.
3) Event detection mode (RVC event) will always synchronize with the setting Event detection mode (Vol-
tage event).
Parameterizing the Event Recorder
To change the Event Recorder, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Recording and Reporting menu and click Event Recorder.
Figure 9-42 Configure Tab, Event Recorders Input/Output Window

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.2 Trigger Management
Table 9-15 Trigger Management

Voltage trigger limits
Trigger active no no
yes
Tolerance unit Percentage Percentage
Numerical
Lower threshold 90.00 % of the 0.00 % to 99.99 % of the nominal/declared supply
nominal/declared voltage
supply voltage
0.0 V to 1 000 000.0 V
Upper threshold 110.00 % of the 100.0 % to 10 000.0 % of the nominal/declared supply
nominal/declared voltage
supply voltage
0.0 V to 1 000 000.0 V
Hysteresis 2.00 % of the nominal/ 0.0 % to 50.0 % of the nominal/declared supply
declared supply voltage
voltage
Detection mode 1) ph-N ph-N

ph-ph
Current trigger limits
yes
Numerical
Lower threshold 90.00 % 0.00 % to 99.99 % of of nominal current In
of nominal current In
0.0 A to 1 000 000.0 A
Upper threshold 110.00 % 100.0 % to 10 000.0 % of of nominal current In
0.0 A to 1 000 000 A
Hysteresis 2.00 % 0.0 % to 50.0 % of of nominal current In
Configuration binary trigger
yes
Trigger source Binary Input 1 Indication 1 from Remote
Indication 2 from Remote
Binary Input 1
Binary Input 2
Trigger value OFF ON
OFF
Waveform capture setting

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-15 Trigger Management
Total recording duration 2.0 s 0.2 s to 3.0 s in 0.2-s steps

Pretrigger ratio 10 % 0 % to 30 % in 5-% steps
Record ph-ph voltage no no
yes
1) The Detection mode will always synchronize with the setting of Record ph-ph voltage under Waveform
capture setting.
Parameterizing the Trigger Management
To change the trigger management settings, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Recording and Reporting menu and click Trigger management.
Figure 9-43 Configure Tab, Trigger Management Input/Output Window

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.3 Recorder Parameter
Table 9-16 Recorder Parameter

Measurement Recorder
PQ data Parameter
Average intervals - Frequency 10 s fixed
Short-term flicker 10 min fixed
Long-term flicker 2h fixed
Average interval - Voltage, 10 min 30 s, 1 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
Unbalance and Harmonics 1 h, 2 h
Record additional data (I, P, Q, no no
S etc.) yes
Recorder of average - Min no no
yes
Recorder of average - Max no no
yes
Harmonics parity Odd Even
Odd
All
File generation every: 1) 24 h At average interval File generation
every:
(corresponds to the setting of
30 s 1 h (fix)
the Average interval parame-
ter) 1 min 2 h (fix)
The created PQDIF files can be 10 min, 15 min, 2h

downloaded via the user inter- 30 min, 1 h or
4h
face or with the IEC 61850 pro- 2h
tocol. 6h
12 h
24 h
Recorded file type PQDIF PQDIF (see 9.4.2.5 File Transfer 285)
CSV
All
Flicker lamp model 230 V 230 V
120 V
Energy value Parameter
Energy value recorder 10 minutes Not configurable
The same as the value of Interval set in
Configure → Energy management →
Energy freeze and reset.
Trend Recorder

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-16 Recorder Parameter

Numerical
Tolerance number Percentage: 3 % of primary 1 % to 5 % in 1-% steps
nominal voltage,
Numerical: 0.5 V 0.2 V to 500.0 V
Maximum recording interval 10 min 10 min, 30 min,
1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h
1) The interval of aggregated values of harmonics and interharmonics will always synchronize with the setting
of Average interval in Measurement recorder.
Parameterizing the Recorder Parameters
To change the Recorder management, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Recording and Reporting menu and click Recorder management.
Figure 9-44 Configure Tab, Recorder Management Input/Output Window
NOTE
The voltage is recorded in the following connection types:
• 3P4W (3 phases/4 wires): phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-ground voltage
• 3P3W (3 phases/3 wires): only phase-to-phase voltage


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.
The Measured-Value Recorder Intervals and the PQDIF Files
The measured-values recorder intervals are defined according to the averaging intervals setting. This will de-
fine the availability of the PQDif files.
Table 9-17 PQDIF File Interval (measured-value recorder)
Set Recording Time at start of Start of recording (recorder start option)

averaging duration for recording of a
interval creating a PQDIF complete PQDIF file
file
30 s 1h 00:00 h - start at the next minute limit

01:00 h - start at the next 10-minute limit
02.00 h - immediate start
.... - start at the next hour limit
22:00 h - start next day
23:00 h
1 min 2h 00:00 h
02:00 h
04.00 h
....
20:00 h
22:00 h
10 min 2 h, 4 h, 6 h, 12 h,
24 h
15 min
30 min
1h
2h

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
A new file is created after a PQDIF file has been completely recorded.
11:00 11:10 12:00 Time
1) 11:10 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. : 1st PQDIF file

2) 12:00 p.m. to 01:00 p.m. : 2nd PQDIF file
…
The device The device

shut down turn on again
11:00 11:10 11:15 11:30 12:00 Time

…
The device The device
shut down turn on again
11:00 11:10 11:40 12:00 12:10 Time

…
Data (recording status)
Figure 9-45 Creating PQDIF Files of the Measured Value Recorder

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Recording with the Trend Recorder
The recording of data points (voltage values with a time stamp) that have exceeded/fallen below the parame-
terized tolerance value (fault) and the associated creation of a PQDIF file is determined by 2 trigger criteria:
• Creation of a PQDIF file after the parameterized Maximum recording interval (for example, 24 h) has
been reached if within this interval no 1024 data points have been generated yet.
• Creating a PQDIF file without considering the parameterized Maximum recording interval, if the voltage
has exceeded/fallen below the tolerance range 1024 times and therefore 1024 data points have been gen-
erated.
Start time
Clock time 0:00 04:00 08:00 12:00 16:00 20:00 24:00
Recording time 06:50 14:15 18:45
Data points 0 1024 / 0 1024 / 0 1024 / 0 120 / 0
Recording Recording Recording all Recording

PQDIF file
all 1024 data points all 1024 data points 1024 data points 120 data points
recording
Figure 9-46 Trend Recorder, Function When the 24 h Interval Is Set
NOTE
A data point is created when the voltage exceeds or falls below the parameterized tolerance value. The data
point represents this voltage value in the PQDIF file.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.4 Mains Signaling Voltage
Table 9-18 Mains Signaling Voltage
Mains signaling voltage measurement
MSV active no no
yes
No. of MSV frequencies 1 frequency 1 frequency

2 frequencies
Frequency 1 216.60 Hz 100 Hz to 3 kHz
Mains signaling voltage capture setting
Detection threshold 1 [% of Udin] 1 % to 15 % of Udin
Total recording duration 75 s 15 s to 120 s in 15-s steps
Changing the Mains Signaling Voltage Parameters
To change the Mains signaling voltage, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Recording and Reporting menu and click Mains signaling voltage.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Figure 9-47 Configure Tab, Mains Signaling Voltage Input/Output Window
✧ After the parameterization, click Send.

If you do not want to make any additional settings, continue with the Activation of the device configuration
changes and then enable the device configuration as described in section Activating the Set of Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.5 Memory Management
Table 9-19 Memory Management
Memory splitting
Event recorder 1.0 % 1 % to 19 % 1)
Measurement recorder 35.0 % 33 % to 51 % 1)

(the recording time depends on
the aggregation interval)
Trend recorder 47.0 % Min. 31 % 2) 3)

(residual storage capacity)
Fault recorder 3.0 % 3 % to 21 % 1)

(number of records depends on
the fault-record time)
Mains signaling voltage recorder 14 % 14 % to 20 % 1)

(number of records depends on
the record time of the mains sig-
naling voltage)
1) The memory sizes for event list, PQ records, fault records, and mains signaling voltage records can be
changed.
2) The memory size for continuous recording is calculated automatically and forms the difference to 100 %
of the total memory size. The maximum total memory size of 100 % cannot be exceeded due to
parameterization errors.
3) If the residual memory capacity falls below 31 %, activation is no longer possible. In this case, the Action
was not successful indication appears on the status bar.
Parameterizing the Memory Allocation
NOTE
If the device has been recording data for a longer period, a modification of the memory areas can lead to the
following indication:
„Memory size should not be changed now. If you active changes, all PQ data will be lost. Please back up data
before activation or cancel changes.”
This indication is issued only if the stored data and the expected data would exceed the memory capacity of
the SD card.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
To change the Memory management, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Recording and Reporting menu and click Memory management.
Figure 9-48 Configure Tab, Storage Input/Output Window
✧ Select the respective parameters in the list boxes according to Table 9-19 and enter the desired values in
the associated fields.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.6 Report Configuration

The Report configuration allows you to parameterize the PQ threshold parameters (User defined). You can
adjust the process connections to the installation environment and enter different operational settings.
Alternatively, you can use the default values according to EN 50160 LV&MV or EN 50160 HV.
Table 9-20 Report Configuration
General Information
Company: - Any text displayed in the

Department: printout of the power quality
Supervisor: report
Inspector:
Location:
Comment:
Power Quality Report
Evaluation mode according to: EN 50160 LV&MV EN 50160 LV&MV

EN 50160 HV
User defined
Flagging acc. to no no
IEC 61000-4-30 yes
Power frequency Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
99.5 % of measurement should be in -1.0 % to 1.0 % deviation of the
power frequency.
100 % of measurement should be in -6.0 % to 4.0 % deviation of the
power frequency.
Power supply voltage magnitude Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
nominal/declared supply voltage.
100 % of measurement should be in -15.0 % to 10.0 % deviation of
the nominal/declared supply voltage.
Flicker severity
95 % of measurement should be less than 1.0
Voltage unbalance 1) Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
95 % of measurement should be less than 2.0 %.
Subgroup Total Harmonic Distortion factor (THDS) Any setting in % for user-
defined evaluation mode

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-20 Report Configuration (cont.)
Voltage event interruptions Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
1. Short interruption until 1 second duration
2. Short interruption until 3 minute duration
3. Long interruption longer than 3 minute duration
Harmonic voltages Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Even harmonics
Odd harmonics: multiples of 3
Odd harmonics: not multiples of 3
Mains signaling voltages 2) Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Supply voltage should be in -15.0 % to +15.0 % deviation of the
nominal/declared supply voltage
99.0 % of “YYY” Hz mains signaling voltage should be less than “xxx”
% of the nominal/declared supply voltage
1)
According to EN 50160, up to 3 % unbalance can occur in 3-wire networks in areas with many 1-wire and
2-wire connections.
2) The frequency “YYY” and limit “xxx” are based on the configured frequency.
NOTE
The factory settings are based on EN 50160. If you have changed the settings, the set parameters are applied
after a device restart. Resetting to the factory settings is possible.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Changing the Report Configuration
To change the report configuration, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window of the Recording and Reporting menu click Report configuration.
Figure 9-49 Configure Tab, Report Configuration Input/Output Window (Excerpt)
✧ Use the buttons to select the evaluation mode or enter the user-defined mode into the fields according to
Table 9-20.

Parameters.
NOTE
The chapter 9.4.2.4 describes the output of the power quality report.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.7 Recording Parameters and Power Quality Data
Table 9-21 Reporting Parameters
Start record option Start next 10th minute Start next minute
Start next 10th minute
Start immediately
Start next hour
Start next day
Start time - Display of the start time according to the settings

of the Date/time format, see chapter 9.3.7.7.
Recording status - Not settable

Recorder status display started or recorder
stopped
Changing the Recording Parameters
To change the recording parameter settings, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window of the Recording and Reporting menu click Recorders - Start/Stop.
Figure 9-50 Configure Tab, Recording Parameters Input/Output Window
✧ Select the parameter in the list box according to Table 9-21.

Parameters.
Depending on the parameterized Start record option, the Start time field shows the start time of the recording.
After activation, the recording starts automatically at the specified time. If the Start immediately option is
selected, the recording also only starts after activation.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
After recording has started, the Recording status fields shows the entry Running.
✧ If you want to stop the recording, click on Stop recording and execute the activation.
The Recording status field shows the entry Not running and Start recording is displayed on the user
interface.
NOTE
The restart of the record is carried out after a power failure automatically.
The status will change from Not running to Running when user change and activate parameters.
Recording Power Quality Data
When the device is started for the first time, it is necessary for the recording of power quality data that the Time
synchronization of the device is set to the current time first. If the time is incorrect, the power quality measure-
ments do not conform to the current time. Proceed as follows:
✧ Refresh the time via Ethernet NTP or Field bus in line with chapter 9.3.7.1 or with the device-internal
clock in line with chapter 9.5.3.2.
✧ Configure all necessary parameters (for example, AC measurement, Communication) on the relevant
tabs, except for the Recording parameters settings.
When setting the parameters, make sure that the settings are consistent with each other (for example,
setting of the flicker lamp model consistent with the primary nominal voltage).
✧ At last, parameterize the Recording parameters and activate the settings.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.6.8 Transient Detection
Table 9-22 Transient Detection
Transient reference level 110 % 110 % to 240 % of the nominal/declared supply voltage
Parameterizing the Transient Detection
If you want to change the Transient reference level, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window of the Recording and Reporting menu, click the element Transient reference
level.
Figure 9-51 Configure tab, transient reference level input/output window
✧ Change the parameter according to Table 9-22.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7 Setting Administrative Parameters

In the Configure tab you can view and if necessary edit the administrative settings. You can select the
parameters in the Administrative menu in the navigation window. These parameters can be changed in the
input/output windows:
• Time synchronization
• Communication Ethernet
• Communication serial
• Modbus slave devices 1 to 8 (only if the Modbus RTU Master protocol has been selected)
• SICAM subdevices
• Device and language
• Syslog
NOTE
Observe the procedure for the device configuration described in chapter 9.3.1 when setting the administrative
parameters.
9.3.7.1 Time Synchronization
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Time Synchronization
Table 9-23 Time Synchronization Settings
Source time synchronization Internal Acc. to list box

(see chapter 16)
Time zone offset to UTC +00:00 -12 to +13 (hours)

(in increments of 0.5 h)
Daylight Saving Time switchover yes no

yes
DST offset +01:00 0 to + 2 (hours)

Start of DST March Acc. to list boxes

Last week (see chapter 16)
Sunday
02:00 AM
End of DST October Acc. to list boxes

Last week (see chapter 16)
Sunday
03:00 AM
Additional Parameters if the Source is Ethernet NTP (Modbus TCP and IEC 61850)
Primary NTP server IP address 192.168.0.254 Any

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-23 Time Synchronization Settings (cont.)
Secondary NTP server IP address 192.168.0.253 Any

No polling of the NTP server if
0.0.0.0 was entered
Error indication after 10 min 2 min to 120 min
Additional Parameter if the Source is Fieldbus (Modbus RTU and IEC 60870-5-103)
Parameterizing the Time Synchronization
To change the time synchronization, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Administrative menu and click Time synchronization.
Figure 9-52 Configure Tab, Time Synchronization Input/Output Window, Ethernet NTP Selected
✧ Enter the desired values in the fields and select the parameters in the list boxes and in the option field as

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.2 Communication Ethernet
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Communication Ethernet
Table 9-24 Communication Ethernet Settings
Communication Ethernet
IP address 1) 192.168.0.55 Any

0.0.0.0 = DHCP
Subnet mask 1) 255.255.255.0 Any
Default gateway 1) 192.168.0.1 Any
Ethernet switch on no no
yes
Enable SNMP no no
yes
OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) no no

yes
Bus protocol Modbus TCP -none-

Modbus TCP
IEC 61850
Both
Protocol Modbus TCP
Use a user-port number 2) no no

yes
User-port number 2) 10 000 10 000 to 65 535

(can only be set when Use a user-port
number is parameterized with yes)
Access rights for user port Full Full

(can only be set when Use a user-port Read only
Access rights for port 502 Full Full

Read only
Keep Alive time 10 s 0 s = switch off

1 s to 65 535 s
Communication supervision time 600 (* 100 ms) 0 s = none

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway

(Condition: The Modbus RTU Master protocol must have been selected under serial communication.)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-24 Communication Ethernet Settings (cont.)
Activated no no
yes
Unit ID of this device 255 1 to 255
Retry limit 3) 2 0 to 10
Response timeout 3) 10 (* 10 ms) (1 to 6000) * 10 ms

= 10 ms to 60 s
Protocol IEC 61850
IED Name SICAM_Q100_01 Max. 60 characters

Only a to z, A to Z, _, 0 to 9
are permitted.
The first character must be a
letter.
Voltage - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Current - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Power - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Power factor - Dead band 5% 2 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Frequency - Dead band 0.05 % 0.02 %

0.05 %
1) After the parameter changes have been enabled, the device will reset.
2) After enabling the parameter changes, any currently active Modbus TCP connections will be closed. The
Modbus TCP client must later reopen these connections.
3) These values are necessary if no Modbus slave device has been configured for the requested Unit ID. If a
Modbus slave device was configured, its values are used.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.2.1 Parameterizing the Ethernet Communication with Modbus TCP Bus Protocol
General Settings Communication Ethernet
To change the Ethernet communication settings, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, click the Administrative menu and then the element Communication
Ethernet. Select the bus protocol Modbus TCP.
Figure 9-53 Configure Tab, Communication Ethernet via Modbus TCP Input/Output Window
NOTE
The enabling of SNMP via option Enable SNMP is only required if you want to save the SICAM Q.mib file and
use it in a MIB browser. See also section If you do not want to make any additional settings, continue with
the Activation of the device configuration according to section Activating the Set of Parameters. If you
want to change other settings, enter the changes and then enable the device configuration as descri-
bed in section Activating the Set of Parameters..
NOTE
After changing the network settings and subsequent parameter activation the device will reset.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Settings Protocol Modbus
NOTE
If you have selected no under Use a user-port number, you can adjust only the Access rights for user
port 502, the Keep Alive time and the Communication supervision time parameters.
Figure 9-54 Protocol Modbus
Settings Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway
NOTE
The Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway function requires that the Modbus RTU Master has been selected as serial
protocol in addition; see chapter 9.3.7.3.
To active Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway, proceed as follows:
✧ Select yes in Administrative → Communication Ethernet → Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway →

Activated.
Figure 9-55 Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields (acc. to Table 9-24).

After clicking Send, the parameters are transmitted to the device but not enabled yet (passive set of

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
parameters).
Parameters.
NOTE
The SNMP protocol is implemented in SICAM Q100 in order to be able to retrieve manufacturer-specific
information.
To retrieve information via SNMP, a MIB browser and the SICAM Q.mib file are required. The MIB browser
allows the displaying of SNMP information objects and their content.
Download SNMP Device MIB File
✧ Select yes in the Enable SNMP option (Figure 9-53).
✧ In the Communication Ethernet input/output window, click Download SNMP device MIB file.
Figure 9-56 File Download Dialog Box
✧ Click Save.
The Save As dialog opens (Figure 9-17) and you can save the SICAM Q.mib file in any folder and use it
in a MIB browser.

parameters).
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.2.2 Parameterizing the Ethernet Communication with IEC 61850 Bus Protocol
✧ In the Bus protocol list box select the entry IEC 61850.
The Communication Ethernet input/output window with Protocol IEC 61850 opens.
Figure 9-57 Configure Tab, Communication Ethernet via IEC 61850 Input/Output Window
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields and select the parameter in the list boxes as described in
Table 9-24.
✧ If several SICAM Q100 devices are used in the substation, change the name of the SICAM Q100 (factory
setting SICAM_Q100_01) in the IED Name field.
The name must be identical to the name which has been parameterized for this SICAM Q100 in the
configurator of the substation.

parameters).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.
Download ICD/IID Files
You can download the following files (see Figure 9-57):

• An individual IID file which contains the data of the currently parameterized network type, for example,
four-wire, any load (3P4W)
This file has the file extension iid.
• A compressed file which contains the ICD files of all available network types, for example, 1p2W, 3P3W2I,
3P3WI3.
The compressed file has the file extension *.zip and its decompressed files have the file extension *.icd.
✧ Click Download IID file.

The IID file with the data of the currently parameterized network type is downloaded to a folder which you
selected.
✧ Click Download ICD.zip file.

The ICD files of all available network types are downloaded in a .zip file to a folder which you selected.
NOTE
If the operation indication Battery Failure appears, after you restart the device, the IID file will be updated. In
this case, you must load the new IID file into your PQS.
No Ethernet Communication
✧ In the Bus protocol list box select the entry -none-.

No Ethernet protocol is available in this case.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.3 OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
NOTE
The protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) is available in the firmware of SICAM Q100 V2.10 or higher and can
only run on the SICAM Q100 devices with expanded memory.
Function Description
The OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) protocol is used to:

• Provide users a flexible and mobile access to the data of protection, power quality, and control devices
• Evaluate the data of protection, power quality, and control devices
The protocol is resolved in the following ways:

• Devices send data from different locations where data is built and stored to cloud services via an Internet
connection.
• You retrieve the grid diagnostic data via Internet in local control centers.
• You use mobile applications for energy management, supervision, alert detection, and maintenance
tasks.
This entire data flow of device interconnectivity (using standardized communication protocols), data access,
and data evaluation via Internet is also called IoT (Internet of Things). The basic cloud services are supplied
by a cloud-service provider, for example, Siemens MindSphere.
Configuration via User Interface
To change the settings of the protocol in the Configure tab, proceed as follows:
✧ Activate the Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) protocol by selecting yes in Configure →
Administrative → Communication → Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
An additional menu item Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) appears in the navigation window.
Figure 9-58 Activation of the OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Protocol via the User Interface
✧ Click Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) in the navigation window.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Input/Output Window opens.
Figure 9-59 Configure Tab, Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Input/Output Window
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
Table 9-25 Protocol OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
Broker and network
Broker IP address or host name mqtt.eu1-b.mindsphere.io Any IP address or host-name string

(maximum 128 characters)
Topic name 1) c/{ClientID}/o/opcua/ Any (maximum 128 characters)

{VersionMS}/u/
{Meas:d|File:d|Meta:m}
Connection mode 2) with TLS, with JSON Web with TLS

Token (JWT) with TLS, with JSON Web Token (JWT)
MQTT user name empty Any (maximum 128 characters)
MQTT password empty Any (maximum 128 characters)
DNS server IP address 0.0.0.0 Any IP address
Data transmission
Harmonics voltage 3) yes yes

no

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Harmonics current 3) yes yes

no
Harmonics power 3) yes yes

no
Energy counters 3) yes yes

no
Energy counters transmit cycle 1 min 1 min to 1440 min
1) Use the template value shown as default in the Topic name for the connection with MindSphere. The parts
in curly brackets are filled internally at startup.
2) Set Connection mode to with TLS, with JSON Web Token (JWT) for the connection with MindSphere.
3) Refer to the manual OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Data Points to identify the individual data points.
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields and select the corresponding parameters in the list boxes as
In the Data transmission section, you can select whether the data groups are transmitted via the OPC
UA PubSub (MQTT) or not. The following data are always transmitted:
 Indications
 operational measured values
 flicker, security counters
 the asset information files
Parameters.
Upload Certificates
You can click Upload certificates to upload the keys and certificates which are needed to establish a secure

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
communication to the OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) broker.
Figure 9-60 Upload Certificates
You can upload an archive file in PCKS#12 format (*.p12 file) and an associated *.pin file with the password.
The *.p12 file contains the following key and certificates:
• The certificate of the CA which generates the client certificate and the private key
• The client certificate
• The client private key
The broker CA certificate must be uploaded as DER file (*.der) or as PEM file (*.pem).
The broker CA and the CA to generate the client certificate and the client private key can be different in the
following case:
• You have your own Certificate Authority installed;
• You use the installed Certificate Authority to generate the key material for the device.
The CA certificate in the *.p12 file may be empty in the following case:
• The client certificate and the client private key are created from the cloud service provider;
• The CA for generating the client key material is the same as the broker CA.
The information above the Upload certificates button indicates whether there is a certificate or not and shows
the

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
date and time when the certificates are uploaded. If no certificate exists in the device, no connection to the
broker can be established.
Figure 9-61 Information above Upload Certificates
NOTE
The Q100 device cannot connect to the OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) broker in any of the following cases:
• The date and time of the device are not synchronized.
• The security certificates and time stamps have expired.
Therefore, you must check the date and time of the device to ensure that they are synchronized, for example,
by selecting Information → Show device information.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Mapping File
Figure 9-62 Mapping File
Mapping Export
Click Mapping export to export the configuration of measured-value data points as a mapping file in the CSV
format.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The mapping file can be opened in a spreadsheet program. The following figure shows an example:
Figure 9-63 Example of Mapping File
The mapping file includes 6 columns, see the following table:
Table 9-26 Columns in the Mapping File
Column Value Description
Name Fixed Name of the data point in IEC 61850 compatible syntax.
Note that the prefix for 10/12 cycles values (refer to Table 9-
27) is always shown even when the data point is configured
as an aggregated value.
If there are phase-related data points (for example, phsA,
phsB, phsC for PhV), only the first data point is shown and the
configured values for phsA are automatically taken over as
the data points for the other phases.
Unit Fixed The unit of the measured value
Transmit [0,1] 0 0 = not transmitted

1 1 = transmitted
This column shows whether the data point is transmitted or
not.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-26 Columns in the Mapping File
Column Value Description
Threshold [%] Point value The threshold value in percentage 1)

Only available for non-aggregated values
Zero-point [Unit] 2) Point value Zero-point suppression value in unit

Only available for non-aggregated values
Aggregate [0,1] 0 0 = 10/12 cycle RMS values

1 1 = aggregated values
This column shows whether the data point is published as
aggregated values or as 10/12 cycle RMS values with
threshold processing.
1)
The threshold value in unit depends on the last value transmitted to the MQTT broker.
2)
If the last transmitted value is 0, a measured-value change is transmitted immediately with a fixed zero-
point suppression value.
Table 9-27 Prefixes of the Names for Different Values
Value Type Prefix
Operational and harmonic values
10/12 cycle RMS values PQA0
Aggregated values PQA2
Minimum values MIN_PQA2
Maximum values MAX_PQA2
Frequency
Aggregated values PQA4
Minimum values MIN_PQA2
Maximum values MAX_PQA2
Threshold
For the transmission of 10/12 cycle RMS values and harmonics, a threshold processing is executed based on
the following thresholds and method:
• The thresholds related to the last transmitted value
• A combined fixed and integrated threshold method

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The default values of thresholds are defined and assigned to the measured values as shown in Table 2-3. You
can change the assignment in the mapping file, see Figure 9-63.
Table 9-28 Default Values of Thresholds for Operation Values and Harmonics
Group Descriptions Threshold
AC voltage Threshold value for voltages (Vx, Vxy) 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
AC current Threshold value for currents (Ix, Ixy) 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
Power Threshold value for power values (P, Q, S) 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
Power factor Threshold value for power-factor values 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
Frequency Threshold value for frequencies 0.05 % (of the last transmitted value)
Percentage value Threshold value for percentage values 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
(Neg. seq. comp., Zero seq. comp., THDR)
Voltage harmonics Threshold value for voltage harmonics 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
Current harmonics Threshold value for current harmonics 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
Harmonics power Threshold value for harmonics power 5 % (of the last transmitted value)
The threshold processing uses a combination of the following methods:

• Fixed
 If the difference percentage is larger than the configured threshold (in positive direction or negative
direction), a measured value is immediately transmitted.
 The difference percentage = (Current value - last transmitted value)/last transmitted value
• Integrated
 If the rolling difference percentage exceeds the configured threshold, a measured value is transmitted.
 The configured integration interval (5 s or its multiplies) decides when the measured value is
transmitted. The following list shows examples.
 If the percentage of the measured-value change is in the configured threshold, a change of the
measured value is transmitted after 5 s.
 If the percentage of the measured-value change is twice the configured threshold, a change of the
measured value is transmitted after 10 s.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
If the last transmitted value is 0, a measured-value change is transmitted immediately as a fixed zero-point
suppression value, see the following table.
Table 9-29 Default Zero-Point Suppression
Group Zero-Point Suppression [Unit]
Measured values except percentage values 0.005
Measured values, percentage values 0.100
Voltage harmonic values 0.040
Current harmonic values 0.040
Harmonic power values 0.040
Energy values are transmitted via MQTT as counter pulses. Additionally, in the OPC UA data unit, a conversion
factor Energy per counter pulse is contained in each transmission.
To calculate the primary value (energy value), the counter pulses must be multiplied with the conversion factor:
Primary value = number of counter pulses ꞏ pulse quantities
60 000 counter pulses per hour are recorded when Vrated and Irated are applied to the device.
Aggregate
There are some restrictions when changing the value in the column Aggregate:
• For operational measured values, you can select 0 (10/12 cycle RMS values) or 1 (aggregated values) for
each measured value.
• For voltage, current, and power harmonics, you can select 0 (10/12 cycle RMS values) or 1 (aggregated
values) for all harmonic values as a group (Vph-N, Vph-ph, I, or P). It is not allowed to have mixed selections
for different harmonics values.
• For phase-related measured values, you can select 0 (10/12 cycle RMS values) or 1 (aggregated values)
for the measured values of phase A, and the selection applies to all the other phase-related values.
If you select 0 in the column Aggregate, the 10/12 cycle RMS values are transmitted. If you select 1
(aggregated values), in addition to the average value, the following values are also transmitted:
• For operational values, the associated minimum values and the maximum operational values are
transmitted.
• For harmonic values, the associated maximum values are transmitted.
You can configure the aggregation interval in Configure → Recording and reporting
→ Recording parameters, see chapter 9.3.6.3.
NOTE
All average, minimum, and maximum values are transmitted every time the aggregation interval expires no
matter whether they have changed or not. The time stamps of all aggregated values are identical and identify
the end time of the last aggregation interval.
Mapping Import
✧ Click Mapping import to import the changed configuration of measured-value data points.
A message appears on the user interface to show whether the mapping file is successfully imported or not.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
If the import is successful, the mapping file is stored permanently in the device and the adapted values
immediately take effect. You do not need to activate the configuration. The existing MQTT communication
connection is closed and a new connection to the MQTT broker is established with the adapted data range
from the imported file.
Default Mapping
✧ Click Default mapping to delete the imported mapping file. The transmission of measured values is set
to default as follows:
 Transmit all measured values
 Transmit all measured values as aggregated values
 Set the default values for thresholds and the zero-point suppression.
If there is no mapping file imported in the device, the button Default mapping is disabled.
NOTE
Siemens recommends selecting yes for all harmonic data groups in Configure → Administrative →
Communication → Analog inputs calibration → Mapping file before exporting the mapping file.
If you need to change the settings of measured values, change them in the exported mapping file.
Publisher ID
Within each sent MQTT telegram, the MQTT publisher identifies itself with a publisher ID string. The publisher
ID used by the Q100 device is assembled in the following format:
Publisher ID string = Device type_Order number_Device name_Serial number
Example: Q100_7KG9501_NSHV-B2_BF1702131010
See the following table for the specific description:
Table 9-30 Publisher ID
Name Description Remark
Device type Q100 Fixed, not configurable
Order number First 7 numbers of the device order Fixed, not configurable
number
Device name Customer-specific device name Configurable
Serial number Unique serial number of the device Fixed, not configurable
Time Synchronization
A valid synchronized date and time in the device is necessary for the MQTT protocol. If the date and time of
the device is not synchronized or is invalid, the SICAM Q100 cannot connect to the MQTT broker for the
following reasons:
• The expiration time of the security certificates must be checked once the connection starts.
• The time stamp of the transmitted data must be valid so that the MQTT broker can analyze the data
properly later.
Siemens recommends using NTP for time synchronization.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Indication of Communication OK
An internal indication Communication OK is available in the operational log, the LED assignment, or a binary
output. This indication means the connection between the device and the MQTT broker is successfully
established. It can be used as an input of a group indication.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.4 Communication Serial via RS485 Interface
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Communication Serial
Table 9-31 Communication Serial Settings
Bus protocol Modbus RTU -none-

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU Master
Bus Protocol Modbus RTU (Slave)
Device address 1 1 to 247
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
Parity Even Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
Access rights Full Full

Read only
Communication supervision time 600 * 100 ms 0 s = none

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Bus Protocol Modbus RTU Master
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)
Parity Even Acc. to list box
(see chapter 16)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-31 Communication Serial Settings (cont.)
Additional inter-character timeout 1 ms 0 ms to 100 ms
The Modbus specification requires that

the individual characters of a serial
Modbus RTU telegram have to be
transmitted successively with a
maximum character gap of 1.5
character times (or max. 750 µs for
Baud rates >19 200 bit/s). Longer silent
intervals between the characters are
interpreted as telegram end.
A longer gap between the characters

can be tolerated with this parameter.
Note that this also causes longer cycle
times then.
If at least one SICAM P50 device is

connected to the bus, at least the
following values have to be set for
Additional character string time:
1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s: 0
4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s: 2
19 200 bit/s: 3
38 400 bit/s: 4
57 600 bit/s, 115 200 bit/s: 6
Maximum 0x/1x register gap 40 0 to 200
Maximum 3x/4x register gap 10 Maximum number of not-mapped reg-

isters which are being requested
between mapped registers in one
request telegram.
The Modbus RTU Master bus protocol must be selected both for Modbus Master and for the Modbus Gateway
function.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Serial Communication with Modbus RTU (Slave) or Modbus RTU Master
To change the serial communication settings, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Administrative menu and click Communication serial.
The Communication serial input/output window opens.
✧ In the list box select Bus protocol.

If you select -none-, no protocol will be available. Click Send in this case.
Figure 9-64 Configure Tab, Communication Serial via Modbus RTU Input/Output Window
Figure 9-65 Configure Tab, Communication Serial via Modbus RTU Master Input/Output Window
✧ Enter the desired values into the fields and select the corresponding parameters in the list boxes as

parameters).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.
9.3.7.5 Modbus Slave Devices 1-8

For the correct functioning of the Modbus RTU Master, the Modbus RTU Master must know all Modbus slave
devices which are connected to the RS485 interface and the data which the devices must read must have been
defined. See also System Manual SICAM Q100, chapter 2.
NOTE
Modbus slave devices can only be parameterized if you selected the communication protocol Modbus RTU
Master.
You can parameterize up to 8 Modbus slave devices. They can be selected in the 2 groups Modbus slave
devices 1-4 and Modbus slave devices 5-8. The parameterization of the 8 Modbus slave devices is identical
and described only for the Modbus slave device 1 in the following.
NOTE
The parameterization sequences for the Modbus RTU Master and the Modbus Gateway are described in detail
in chapter 9.8.
9.3.7.5.1 Basic Settings
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Modbus Slave Device 1
Table 9-32 Settings of the Modbus slave device 1
Name Modbus slave device 1 Max. 31 characters
Activated no no
yes (= Activation of the option field):

The buttons for parameterization of the
mapping data are also activated for the
slave device here.
Device address/Unit ID 1 1 to 247
(Modbus slave device address) Address corresponds to the Unit ID

in the Modbus TCP telegram with simul-
taneous use of the Modbus Gateway
function.
Response timeout 10 (*10 ms) 1 to 6000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 60 s)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-32 Settings of the Modbus slave device 1
Retry limit 2 0 to 10
(0 = no request retries)
Number of request retries after expira-

tion of Response timeout before a com-
munication error for the Modbus slave is
identified.
Scan cycle for measured values 50 (* 10 ms) 0 to 36 0000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 1 h)
0 = each request cycle
Minimum time difference between the

measured-value requests.
Scan cycle for indications 0 (* 10 ms) 0 to 36 0000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 1 h)
Minimum time difference between the in-

dication requests.
Scan cycle on error 5s 1 to 3600 s

( 1 s to 1 h)
Retry cycle for sending request tele-

grams if the retry limits are exceeded or
in the case of error responses.
Buttons: inactive The buttons in the Mapping columns are

Import only activated if the option Activated =
Export yes has been set. The functions of the
Measured values 1-8 and 9-15 buttons are described in chapter
Indications 9.3.7.5.2 to chapter 9.3.7.5.5.
Commands

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing a Modbus Slave Device
If you want to change the settings of a Modbus slave device (for example, Modbus slave device 1), proceed as
follows:
✧ In the navigation window, click the Administrative menu and the menu item Modbus slave devices 1-4
or Modbus slave devices 5-8.
Figure 9-66 Configure tab, Modbus slave devices input/output window, device 1 activated
✧ Activate the device 1.
✧ In the Parameter fields, enter the desired values according to Table 9-32.
✧ In the Mapping columns, select the settings/activities which have been assigned to the buttons. The
function of the buttons is described in chapter 9.3.7.5.2 to chapter 9.3.7.5.5.

parameters).
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.5.2 Mapping – Measured Values 1-15
At Measured values 1-8 and Measured values 9-15, the measured values are defined which are read by a
selected Modbus slave device.
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Modbus Slave Device 1
Table 9-33 Settings for assignment of the measured values of the Modbus slave device 1
Name MV x Slv 1 Max. 31 characters 1)

(x = 1 to 15)
Unit Multiplier: - Acc. to list box

Unit: -none-
Note on frequency measured (see chapter 16)
values:
Selecting a multiplier for the following
If a frequency measured value units is not recommended and will be re-
(unit: Hz) has been parameterized jected:
without a multiplier (multiplier: -), an -none-
additional check is made whether °
the resulting value is in the range of °C
15 Hz to 65 Hz. Measured values °F
outside this range are marked as in- %
valid.
Register type -none- -none-

Input registers
Holding registers
For -none-, the assignment is ignored

and the corresponding measured value
cannot be selected for other functions.
Data format on bus Float32 (2 registers) Float32 (2 registers)

Int16 (1 register)
(see also Table 9-34.) Int16_Ung8000h (1 register)
UInt16 (1 register)
UInt32 (2 registers)
Register number 1 1 to 65 535
Scaling factor 1.000 Any float value

0.00: resulting measured value = 0.00
1) If the name is also to be displayed on the device display without text overlappings, Siemens recommends
using max. 10 characters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-34 Data Format on Bus
Data Format Description Setting Range Invalid Used by (example)

on Bus recognition
Float32 IEEE Float value -1038 to +1038 NaN = invalid SENTRON PAC3x00,
(2 registers) INF = overflow SICAM AI 7XV5674,
SICAM T 7KG966,
SICAM P50 7KG775
Int16 16-bit signed - 32 768 to +32 768 none SENTRON 3WL/3VL

(1 register) integer SICAM P50 7KG775
Int16_Ung8000h 16-bit signed -32768 bis +32768 -32768 (8000h) SIPROTEC 4

(1 register) integer = invalid
UInt16 16-bit integer, 0 to +65 535 none SENTRON 3WL/3VL

(1 register) 0
UInt32 32-bit integer, 0 to +4 294 967 295 none SIPROTEC 4,

(2 registers) 0 SENTRON 3WL/3VL

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Measured Values of a Modbus Slave Device
If you want to change the settings of the measured values of a Modbus slave device (for example, Modbus
slave device 1), proceed as follows:
✧ Click Measured values 1-8 or Measured values 9-15.
Figure 9-67 Measured Values 1-8
✧ In the list boxes, select the parameters according to Table 9-33 and Table 9-34. Enter the desired values
in the fields.

parameters).
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.5.3 Mapping – Indications
At Indications, the indications are defined which are read by a selected Modbus slave device.
Default Settings and Settings of the Modbus Slave Device 1
Table 9-35 Settings for assignment of the indications of the Modbus slave device 1
Name Indication x Slv 1 Max. 31 characters

(x = 1 to 6)

Coil status registers
Input status registers
Input registers
Holding registers

and the corresponding indication cannot
be selected for other functions.
Data format on bus 1 Bit 1 Bit

1 Bit in UInt 32
(see also Table 9-36.)
Bit offset 0 0 to 15 (for Data format 1 Bit)

(only relevant for register types 0 to 31 (for Data format 1 Bit in UInt32)
Input register or Holding register)
Table 9-36 Data format on Bus
Data Format Description Setting Invalid Used by (example)

on Bus Range recognition
1 Bit 1 bit (for all register types; addi- 0 = of none SICAM P50 7KG775,
tionall select Bit offset for Input 1 = on SENTRON 3WL/3VL,
register and Holding register) SIPROTEC4
1 Bit in UInt32 1 bit in 2 successive Input regis- 0 = of none SENTRON PAC3x00

ters or Holding registers which 1 = on
have to be read together.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Indications of a Modbus Slave Device
If you want to change the settings of the indications of a Modbus slave device (for example, Modbus slave de-
vice 1), proceed as follows:
✧ Click the button Indications..
Figure 9-68 Indications 1-6
✧ In the list boxes, select the parameters according to Table 9-35 and Table 9-36. Enter the desired values
in the fields.

parameters).
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.5.4 Mapping – Export
Several Modbus slave devices of the same type can be connected to SICAM Q100. This is the case, for
example, if feeders that are configured identically exist in a substation. These devices frequently read the
same data then.
You can use the export function of the device to export the configuration of a Modbus slave device (for example,
Modbus slave device 1) which is parameterized in SICAM Q100 to the connected PC. After that, you can import
this configuration from the PC either into this SICAM Q100 (for example, Modbus slave device 3) or into other
SICAM Q100 devices.
✧ Click the button Export.

The input/output window Modbus RTU master displays the Modbus slave device and the dialog File
download.
Figure 9-69 Export
✧ In the dialog File download, click Save or Open.
File download → Save
✧ In the dialog File download, click Save.

The Save in: dialog opens.
✧ Select the file path.
✧ Use the file name suggested in the File name: list box or enter a new file name with the file extension .txt.
✧ Click Save.
✧ In the dialog Download complete, click Close.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
File download → Open
Alternatively, you can view the information on the screen and print them if needed. Proceed as follows:
✧ In the File download dialog, click Open.

A text editor opens which contains the mapping information on the Modbus slave device (CLIENT
MAPPING INFORMATION (see following section)).
✧ On the menu bar of the text editor, click File → Print....
✧ Select the desired printer in the Print dialog and click Print.
The list is printed on the connected printer.
✧ Close the text editor.
CLIENT MAPPING INFORMATION
The CLIENT MAPPING INFORMATION is created as a text file when the export function is triggered. The fol-
lowing example shows a configuration with 3 measured values and 3 indications.
Configuration of measured values:
Figure 9-70 Configuration of 3 Measured Values (example)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Configuration of indications:
Figure 9-71 Configuration of 3 indications (example)
Created CLIENT MAPPING INFORMATION from the 3 measured values and indications each as text file:
Figure 9-72 Resulting CLIENT MAPPING INFORMATION (example)
The following table contains the description of the labels in the text file:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Description and setting ranges of the parameters in the text file:
Table 9-37 Description and setting ranges of the parameters in the text file.
Label Measured Description Setting Range

Quantity (MV)
Indication (I)
MT MV Mapping Type MEASURAND

(Data type) INDICATION
DS MV, I Description String with max. 31 characters
Name of the associated data object Longer strings are cut at 31 cha-
racters during import.
RN MV, I Register number 1 to 65 535
(within the selected register type

RT)
RT MV, I Register type 0x0 – Coil status register

0x1 – Input status register
0x3 – Input register
0x4 – Holding register
OF I Bit offset 0 to 15 (for FT = 1BIT)
(for INDICATION in Holding regis- 0 to 31 (for FM = 1BITINUINT32)

ters)
FM MV, I Data format For MEASURAND:

FLT32, INT16, UINT16, UINT32,
INT16INV7FFF and INT16INV8000
For INDICATION:
1BIT, 1BITINUINT32
SC MV Scaling factor for MEASURAND Arbitrary float value
UN MV Unit-multiplier for MEASURAND 1: dimensionless

2: Meter
3: kg
4: s
5: A
23: °C
29: V
33: Hz
38: W
39: Pa
41: m2
42: m3
61: VA
63: var
64: °
71: VAh
72: Wh
73: varh
75: %
76: °F

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-37 Description and setting ranges of the parameters in the text file.
Label Measured Description Setting Range

Quantity (MV)
Indication (I)
ML MV Factor (Unit multiplier) for measu- -3: milli (m)

ring value -2: centi (c)
-1: deci (d)
0: no multiplier
2: hecto (h)
3: kilo (k)
6: Mega (M)
9: Giga (G)
9.3.7.5.5 Mapping – Import
✧ Click the button Import.
Figure 9-73 Import
✧ Click Browse....
✧ Select the desired file (extension .txt) in the directory.
✧ In the tab, click Open.

The information of the text file is applied by SICAM Q100 and interpreted in the passive parameter set. In
the case of faulty data, an error message is entered in the error log, see chapter 9.2.7.2.
NOTE
100 english characters. Otherwise, the .txt file in your device will not be updated.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.6 SICAM Subdevices

The internal Ethernet switch and a Y cable or an external Ethernet switch can be used to connect up to 2 sub-
devices of the type SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673 to SICAM Q100. The communication takes place with the Modbus
UDP protocol. For further information and connection examples, refer to the System Manual SICAM Q100,
chapter 2.
9.3.7.6.1 SICAM Subdevice – Parameterization in SICAM Q100
Default Settings and Settings of the SICAM Subdevices
Table 9-38 Settings of the SICAM Subdevices
Parameter/Indications Default Setting Setting Options
Subdevice 1 -none- -none-

SICAM IO
Subdevice 2 No further indications are
displayed.
Subdevice 1
Server IP address 192.168.0.56 any

(different from IP address of subde-
vice 2 and in the same subnet as
SICAM Q100)
Server port 51 000 10 000 to 65 535
Response timeout 3 (* 10 ms) 10 ms to 60 000 ms

0 ms = invalid
Parameter: Source of output 1-N Indication 3 from Remote Parameter: see 16 Operating Pa-
rameters 397
Indication: Input 1-N Binary inp. 1-N SICAM IO 1
Indication: any, max. 31 characters
Parameter: Source of output 2-N Indication 4 from Remote
Indication: Input 2-N Binary inp. 2-N SICAM IO 1 Parameter Source of output:
Selection which indication is trans-
mitted from SICAM Q100 to the
binary output of the SICAM I/O Unit
7XV5673.
Parameter: Source of output 1-P Indication 6 from Remote
Indication Input:
Indication: Input 1-P Binary inp. 1-P SICAM IO 1 Designation of the indication which
shows the status of the binary input
Parameter: Source of output 2-P Indication 7 from Remote of SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673.
Indication: Input 2-P Binary inp. 2-P SICAM IO 1
Subdevice 2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-38 Settings of the SICAM Subdevices (cont.)
Server IP address 192.168.0.57 any

(different from IP address of subde-
vice 1 and in the same subnet as
SICAM Q100)
Server port 51 000 10 000 to 65 535

0 ms = invalid
Parameter: Source of output 1-N Indication 9 from Remote Parameter: see 16 Operating Para-
meters 397
Indication: Input 2-N Binary inp. 2-N SICAM IO 2 Parameter Source of output:
Selection which indication is trans-
mitted from SICAM Q100 to the
binary output of the SICAM I/O Unit
7XV5673.
Indication Input:
Indication: Input 1-P Binary inp. 1-P SICAM IO 2 Designation of the indication which
shows the status of the binary input
Parameter: Source of output 2-P Indication 13 from Remote of SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing a SICAM Subdevice in SICAM Q100
If you want to change the settings of a SICAM subdevice (for example, Subdevice 1: SICAM IO), proceed as
follows:
✧ In the navigation window, click the Administrative menu and the menu item SICAM subdevices.
The SICAM subdevices input/output window opens.
✧ In the Subdevice 1 list box, select the entry SICAM IO.

If you select -none- , no entries exist for the subdevice.
Figure 9-74 Configure Tab, SICAM Subdevices Input/Output Window
✧ In the list boxes, select the respective indication according to Table 9-38. Enter the desired values in the
fields.
NOTE
Indication 1 from remote and Indication 2 from remote are provided for controlling the two binary outputs
of the SICAM Q100. Therefore, Indication 3 from remote is the first assigned indication as Source of output
of the SICAM subdevices.

parameters).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameters.
The factory settings of the Source of output x parameters are controllable indications, for example,
Indication 3 from Remote, and can be controlled via the Modbus TCP or IEC 61850 protocols. You can also
parameterize an internal indication from SICAM Q100 in the list boxes.
If one or two SICAM I/O Units have been selected as subdevices, the indications on the status of the binary
inputs of these devices are also available in the group indications (see chapter 9.3.3.2.2), the indications of the
LEDs (see chapter 9.3.3.1.4), and the indications of the binary outputs (see chapter 9.3.3.1.3).
9.3.7.6.2 Parameter Settings of the SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673 (Subdevice)
NOTE
A detailed description of all parameter settings of the SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673 and a description of that device
is given in the Device Manual, order number E50417-H1040-C484.
Settings of the Ethernet Communication of the SICAM I/O Unit
Table 9-39 Settings of the Ethernet Communication in the SICAM I/O Unit Subdevice
IP address At IP address, enter the same IP address as in SICAM Q100  I/O Unit sub-
device under Server IP address.
SICAM Q100 and SICAM I/O Unit must have different IP addresses.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Identical to the subnet mask of the SICAM Q100
Default gateway 192.168.0.1 Any
Ethernet switch on no Activation of the second port of the internal Ether-

net switch
Bus protocol/Operating I/O Mirror server You must select I/O Mirror Server for connection to
mode the SICAM Q100.
Operating Mode I/O Mirror Server
Port number 51 000 Port number for the Ethernet communication

between SICAM Q100 and SICAM I/O Unit
Communication super- 8 (*10 ms) –

vision time

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
If you have connected a SICAM I/O Unit as subdevice at the SICAM Q100 and want to change the settings at
the subdevice, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window of the SICAM I/O Unit, click the Administrative menu and then Communication
Ethernet.
Figure 9-75 Communication Settings in the SICAM I/O Unit if the Device is Connected to a SICAM Q100
✧ Enter the values in the fields according to Table 9-39 and select Operating mode I/O Mirror server from
the list box.

Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Settings for Binary Outputs in the SICAM I/O Unit
Table 9-40 Settings of the Binary Outputs in the SICAM I/O Unit Subdevice
Indication -none- See Device Manual

(can be set individually for all relay outputs) SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673
(can be set individually for all relay outputs) yes
Operating mode Persistent See Device Manual

(can be set individually for all relay outputs) SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673
To change the outputs of a binary output, proceed as follows:
submenu and click Binary outputs.
Figure 9-76 Configure Tab, Binary Outputs of SICAM I/O Unit Input/Output Window

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Checking Additional Settings in the SICAM I/O Unit Subdevice
Binary Inputs
✧ Check the Threshold voltage and Software filter time settings of the binary inputs:
Figure 9-77 Binary Inputs of SICAM I/O Unit
✧ Check the time synchronization settings and select preferably Ethernet NTP as the source of time
synchronization, if available.
Communication indication
If data are exchanged correctly between SICAM Q100 and the SICAM I/O Unit, the indication I/O Mirror server
OK is set to ON in the SICAM I/O Unit.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.6.3 Commissioning Notes
If the SICAM I/O Unit subdevices are connected correctly to the SICAM Q100, the Ethernet communication pa-
rameters are set correctly in both devices (the SICAM Q100 and the SICAM I/O Unit), and communication in-
terruptions still occur (sporadically) then the communication supervision times have to be adapted.
Higher network load or use of different communication features simultaneously in the device may be the reason
for the communication interruptions. In this case, increase the communication supervision times in the devices
as follows:
NOTE
The parameters Response timeout in the SICAM Q100 (see Table 9-38) and Communication supervision time
in the SICAM I/O Unit subdevices (see Table 9-39) must always be changed together.
If two SICAM I/O Unit subdevices are used then the Response timeouts for both devices have to be set iden-
tically.
Calculation
The relationship of the supervision times in the SICAM Q100 and the SICAM I/O Unit results from:
ResponseTimeout [ms] £ (CommunicationSupervisionTime [ms] - 20 [ms]) / 2
Or in reverse order:
CommunicationSupervisionTime [ms] ³ (2 * ResponseTimeout [ms]) + 20 [ms]
Parameterization Example
✧ Change the Communication supervision time in the SICAM I/O Unit to 200 ms for the reasons mentioned
above (ref. to chapter 9.3.7.6.2.)
According to the formulas above a Response timeout of 90 ms is calculated.
✧ Change the parameter in the SICAM Q100 for example to: Response timeout = 60 ms (ref. to chapter
9.3.7.6.1)
NOTE
Note that the communication supervision times are entered in the user interface (HMI) in multiples of 10 ms.
For the example above enter the values 20 for the Communication supervision time in the SICAM I/O Unit and
6 for a Response timeout in the SICAM Q100.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.7 Device and Language
Default Settings and Setting Ranges for Device and Language
Table 9-41 Device and Language Settings
Device name SICAM_xxx Max. 31 characters

Only a to z, A to Z, -, _, blank space, .,
0 to 9, Ü, ü, Ä, ä, Ö, ö, ß are permitted.
Language ENGLISH (US) ENGLISH (US)

User language acc. to preselection of
user language:
DEUTSCH (DE) or
CHINESE (CN)
Date/time format YYYY-MM-DD, Acc. to list box

Time with 24 hours
(see chapter 16)
User language preselection DEUTSCH (DE) DEUTSCH (DE)

CHINESE (CN)
NOTE
If the user interface stays on pages with the following remark at the right bottom, you must log out manually:
Page will refresh automatically, please log out manually if needed.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
To change the settings of device and language, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Administrative menu and click Device and language.
Figure 9-78 Configure Tab, Device and Language Input/Output Window
✧ Select the desired parameters in the list box according to Table 9-41.
✧ If necessary, change the user language (see below).

parameters).
Parameters.
Changing the User Language Preselection
The user language can be preset, for example when starting the User Interface for the first time (see chapter
9.2.1). DEUTSCH is set by default.
NOTE
If you change the user language, the device will restart after pressing the Send button and subsequently acti-
vating the settings.
To change the user language, proceed as follows:
✧ Select the user language of the User Interface in the User language preselection list box.
✧ Click the Send button.

The message "User language was changed, automatic restart shall take place after Activation!" is
displayed in red on the status bar.
✧ Activate the device configuration as described in “Activating the Set of Parameters”.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
After the activation, the Language list box in the upper part of the input/output window shows the standard
language ENGLISH (US) and the selected user language.
NOTE
You can also change individual parameters in the Device and language input/output window and apply them
by clicking the Send button.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.8 Syslog
In addition to showing audit logs in the Maintenance tab via the user interface, the device supports transmitting
the audit logs to a central log server using Syslog.
Syslog is a well-established internationally implemented standard for message logging.
Syslog allows the separation of the following:

• The software that generates messages
• The system that stores messages
• The software that reports and analyzes messages
Computer system designers can use Syslog for system management and security auditing as well as general
informational, analysis, and debugging messages. Various devices, such as printers, routers, and message
receivers across many platforms use the Syslog standard. For example, a Q100 device works as a device and
a Kiwi Syslog service manager works as a receiver.
9.3.7.8.1 Basic Settings
Default Settings and Setting Ranges of the Syslog
Table 9-42 Settings of the Syslog
Syslog active No No
Yes
If you set the Syslog active parameter to yes, the following parameters are visible:
Primary Syslog server 0.0.0.0 Any
Port 514 0 to 65 535
Secondary Syslog server 0.0.0.0 Any
Port 514 0 to 65 535

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Parameterizing the Syslog
To change the settings of the Syslog, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Administrative menu and click Syslog.
Figure 9-79 Configure Tab, Syslog Input/Output Window
✧ In the Parameter fields, enter the desired values according to Table 9-42.

parameters).
Parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.3.7.8.2 View via Syslog Server
If the Syslog function in a Q100 device is activated and the Syslog server is running, you can read the audit
logs from the Syslog server. The audit logs are sent to the configured Syslog server using the UDP protocol
when the logs are recorded in the Q100 device.
You can see the audit logs from the Kiwi Syslog Service Manager, see the following figure.
Figure 9-80 Audit Logs on the Kiwi Syslog Service Manager
The following security messages are listed:

• Date of receiving the security message
• Time of receiving the security message
• Priority of the message, which is defined by the Syslog server
• Hostname of the device which generates the security message
• Message description

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4 Value View and Evaluation
9.4.1 Process Connections and Automation Functions

The values for Operational parameters (Process connections and Automation functions) are displayed in
the Value view and Evaluation tab. To display the values on the screen, proceed as follows:
✧ Select the Value view and Evaluation tab on the user interface.
Figure 9-81 Value View and Evaluation Tab
✧ In the navigation window, open the Operational parameters menu, then the Process connections or
Automation functions submenu and click one of the following items:
 AC operational values
 Harmonics voltage
 Harmonics current
 Harmonics power
 Harmonics power direction
 Interharmonics voltage
 Interharmonics current
 AC power and energy
 Frozen energy counters: see chapter 9.4.1.4
 Flicker
 Binary status: see chapter 9.4.1.5
 Modbus slave devices: see chapter 9.4.1.6
 SICAM subdevices: see chapter 9.4.1.7
 Load profile: see chapter 9.4.1.8
 Tariff (TOU): see chapter 9.4.1.9
 Limits
 Group indications

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Depending on which operational parameters are selected, the input/output window displays the measured
values with the corresponding unit or indications in a tabular list that is updated every 5 s.Harmonics and
interharmonics can represent you in tabular form or graphically.
NOTE
If symbol *** is displayed instead of a value, this value is invalid.
If symbol ^^^ is displayed instead of a value, this value is in overflow.
To print out the value, click the (Print) icon on the toolbar of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
9.4.1.1 Evaluation of Harmonics Voltage and Harmonics Current

The values for harmonics are displayed in the Value view and evaluation tab. If you want to display the values
on the screen, proceed as follows:
✧ In the Value view and evaluation tab, click Operational parameters → Process connections →
Harmonics voltage or Harmonics current.
Figure 9-82 Example for a Table of Voltage Harmonics
The parameter Hide Harmonic when magnitude is lower than % is displayed above the measurement table.
This parameter indicates from which RMS value of the voltage or the currenton the display of the harmonic shall
be hidden. This threshold value is active if you press the ENTER key. It is not necessary to activate the
parameter. It helps to filter out harmonics which are not interested by customer.
For a prevailing ratio below 0.8, the corresponding harmonic is not stable, which will be shown in red color.
If one of the spectral lines ±5 Hz of the harmonic frequency is greater than 2 % of the RMS value of the
harmonic, the corresponding value is displayed in blue as indication.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Display of Voltage and Current Harmonics
Current and voltage harmonics can be displayed as a Table or as a Diagram.
✧ Select the desired display form in the Measurement output list box.
✧ Click Display to confirm the selection.
Table
Figure 9-83 Example for a Table of Voltage Harmonics
The measurements shown in the first table have the following meanings:
Table 9-43 The Meanings of the Measurements in the First Table
Measurement Meaning
THDS voltage [%] Subgroup total harmonic distortion: ratio of the RMS value of the harmonic
subgroups to the RMS value of the subgroup associated with the fundamental
THDR [%] Total harmonic distortion related to the total RMS value in %
THD-2650 [%] Total upper band Harmonics Distortion (26th to 50th) related to the fundamental in
%
K-factor [-] K-factor is a weighting of the harmonic load currents according to their effects on
transformer heating.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The parameters shown in the second table have the following meanings:
Table 9-44 The Meanings of the parameters in the Second Table
Parameter Meaning
Harmonics Magnitude [%] Harmonic magnitudes in %
Harmonics Angle [°] Harmonic phase angle in °
Harmonics PreAngle [° Prevailing phase angle in °
Harmonics PR [-] Prevailing ratio
Diagram
The voltage-harmonics or current-harmonics diagram only shows the RMS values of the harmonic.
Figure 9-84 Example for a Voltage-Harmonic Diagram
9.4.1.2 Evaluation of Harmonics Power

If you want to display the instantaneous harmonic power values, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the Value view and evaluation tab, click Operational parameters → Process connections
→ Harmonics power.
Figure 9-85 Example for a Table of Harmonics Power
The parameter Hide Harmonic when apparent power is lower than VA is displayed above the measurement
table. This parameter indicates from which amount of power on the display of the harmonic is hidden. It helps
to filter out harmonics that you are not interested in. If you press the ENTER key, the value set for this parameter
is active. It is not necessary to activate the parameter.
If one of the spectral lines ±5 Hz of the harmonic frequency is greater than 2 % of the RMS value of the
harmonic, the corresponding value is displayed in blue as an indication.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Display of Harmonics Power and Interpretation for Harmonic Direction
Figure 9-86 Example for a Power-Harmonic Table
The sign of the active power of the single harmonic determines the power-flow direction:
• Positive sign: from supply system to the load
• Negative sign: from load to the supply system

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.3 Harmonics Power Direction

If you want to display the harmonics power direction of the aggregated values in a diagram, proceed as follows:
✧ In the Value view and evaluation tab, click Operational parameters → Process connections
→ Harmonics power direction.
Figure 9-87 Example for a Harmonics Power Direction Diagram
The harmonics power value shown in the diagram is calculated using the following factors:
• The aggregated voltage harmonics (average only)
• The aggregated current harmonics (average only)
• The prevailing angles including the prevailing factors at the end of each aggregation interval
The sign of the active power of the aggregated harmonics shows the direction:
• Positive sign: demand side, shown in green
• Negative sign: supply side, shown in blue
The confidence of the harmonics power value determines whether the direction is stable or not. If the
confidence is lower than 0.91, the direction of the harmonic power is not shown in the diagram. The confidence
is calculated from the prevailing factors of the voltage and current harmonics.
The aggregated harmonics power values are shown on the HMTL page. The harmonics power values and the
confidence values are stored in the PQDIF file.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.4 Frozen Energy Counters

The frozen energy counters are displayed as follows:
Figure 9-88 Frozen Energy Counters

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.5 Evaluation of Binary Status

The status of the binary inputs and outputs is checked and displayed as follows:
Figure 9-89 Binary Status
Status Binary Input – Terminals U1/2 and U3/2
Depending on the parameterization (for routing, see chapter 9.3.3.1.2), either the status information or the
source is evaluated.
Status Binary Output – Terminals G1/2 and G3/2
Depending on the parameterized source type (see chapter 9.3.3.1.3), the indications routed to the binary
outputs and/or power meters are evaluated.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.6 Evaluation of Modbus Slave Devices

The connection status of the up to 8 Modbus slave devices is checked and displayed as follows:
Figure 9-90 Connection status of Modbus slave devices
Connection Status
The following connection statuses are possible:
Table 9-45 Connection Status
Status Description
good The assigned information could be requested successfully.
no response The Modbus slave device does not respond; communication failure or device
switched off.
no mapping data Data mapping was not configured for the device. Therefore, data are not
requested.
excp. response At least one request was answered with a Modbus error feedback.
msg. error Errors in the evaluation of a response telegram (for example, CRC error)
deactivated The Modbus slave device was not configured.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Viewing Measured Values and Indications
✧ In the Information column (see Figure 8-69), click View values:
NOTE
The button is not enabled if the status shows deactivated and no mapping data, see table 9-45.
Figure 9-91 View Values
Measured values and indications are displayed for the respective Modbus slave device.
For measured values, *** is displayed and for indications, 'invalid' is displayed if the value was received with
an Invalid identifier or the value could not be read (for example, interrupted connection to the Modbus slave
device).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.7 Evaluation of SICAM Subdevices

In SICAM Q100, the connected and parameterized SICAM subdevices issue the indications of their binary in-
puts and outputs.
Figure 9-92 Indications of the SICAM subdevices
Values of the Indications
Table 9-46 Values of the indications of the binary inputs and outputs
Value Description
On State of the binary inputs and outputs
Off
Invalid The indication is invalid, for instance, because there is an interruption of the data
line.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

The load profile is displayed as follows:
Figure 9-93 Download the load profile
In the decimal separator, you can select whether you want to display the load-profile data with comma or
decimal point after the download.
To download the load profile, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Click Download load profile.
Figure 9-94 Opening or saving the load profile file
File download → Save
✧ In the dialog File download, click Save.

The Save in: dialog opens..
✧ Select the file path.
✧ Use the file name suggested in the File name: list box or assign a new file name with the file extension
.csv.
✧ Click Save.
✧ In the dialog Download complete, click Close.
File download → Open
Alternatively, you can view the information on the screen and print them if needed. Proceed as follows:
✧ In the File download dialog, click Open.

An Excel file with the load profile values opens.
✧ On the menu bar of the text editor, click File → Print....

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.1.9 Tariffs (TOU)

With SICAM Q100, you can determine 8 tariffs for all energy types. Their values are displayed in the following
input/output window:
Figure 9-95 Evaluation of Tariffs
To view the tariff values, click the radio buton before each tariff. Tariff 1(Current Tariff) is ticked by default.
After the data transmission, the values are processed further in the peripheral devices.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2 Evaluation and Data Management

The power quality values and other events are output on the Value view and evaluation tab in the Evaluation
and data management menu. The menu contains the following items:
• Events
• Records
• Mains signaling voltage
• Power Quality report
• File transfer
• Memory management
• Transient detection
To display the values on the screen, proceed as follows:
✧ Select the Value view and evaluation tab on the user interface.
The Value view and evaluation tab opens.
✧ Select the desired values according to chapter 9.4.2.1 to Figure 9-115 in the Evaluation and data
management menu in the navigation window.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.1 Events
Default Settings and Setting Options
Table 9-47 Value View and Evaluation - Events
Event record type Supply Voltage Voltage event

Frequency event
Voltage unbalance event
RVC event 1)
Start time Current date/time Any with calendar function

Time format: depends on date/time format config.
End Time Current date/time Any with calendar function

Measured-value output Table Table

CSV
1) For RVC event, there is no CSV or diagram available.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click Events.
Figure 9-96 Value View Tab and Evaluation, Events Input/Output Window, Supply Voltage
✧ Select the desired Event record type in the list box according to Table 9-47 and specify the Start time
and End time using the calendar function.
✧ Select from the Measured-value output list box whether the measured values are to be output as a Table
or a CSV file is to be created.
Measured-Value Output as Table
✧ Click Display.
The determined results are displayed in a table. In multi-paged tables you can navigate forward and back
in the pages using the >> and << buttons. If you want to view a certain page, enter the page at the bottom
and click on show.
The results can be displayed graphically using COMTRADE viewer (link in Diagram column).
If you select Voltage event for the Event record type and select Table as the Measured-value output
form, you can see the following columns about the voltage-event direction in the displayed table:
 Direction

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
This parameter indicates the direction of the voltage event: Forward and backward are definitions
from the perspective of the customer.
 Direction confidence
This parameter indicates the correctness of the calculated direction based on the algorithm.
If the confidence factor is too low, the Direction is shown as undirected.
NOTE
In the Find result list, Related phase only displays the current trigger phases of the selected event detection
mode, but Diagram will display the voltage information of all the phases that meet the trigger condition.
When an event has occurred, with this setting the recordings are marked in red on the record list under Find
result list. And a message is shown under the list when an event happens. For information about the flagging
concept, please refer to chapter 4.1.1.
Measurement Output as CSV File
✧ Click Download.
Figure 9-97 Dialog File Download
✧ Click Save.
The Save As dialog opens.
✧ Select the file path in the Save in: list box.
✧ Use the file name suggested in the File name: list box or enter a new file name with the file extension .csv.
NOTE
The length of file names must not exceed 8 characters. Use only characters according to NOTE in chapter
9.3.1.2.
✧ Click Save.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ In the Download complete dialog, click Close.
File Download → Open CSV File
Alternatively, you can view the event data on the screen and print them if needed. Proceed as follows:
✧ In the File download dialog (Figure 9-97), click Open.

The selected CSV file is opened in Microsoft Excel and the event data are displayed in table form.
✧ On the menu bar, click File → Print....
✧ Close Microsoft Excel.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.2 Records
Table 9-48 Value View and Evaluation - Records
Record type Measurement Trend Recorder

recorder Measurement recorder
Measurement Recorder
Start time Current time Any with calendar function

Time format: depends on date/time
format config.
End time no setting, only display
Measurement source Frequency 10 s Frequency 10 s

Voltage
Current
Voltage angle
Current angle
Active power
Reactive power
Apparent power
Active power factor
Power factor
Phase angle
Frequency
Unbalance
THDS voltage
THDS current
Q1
Harmonic voltage magnitude
Harmonic current magnitude
Short-term flicker
Long-term flicker
Measurements f - 10 s The selectable Measurements

depend on the selected Measurement
Source.
Aggregation Type AVG AVG

MIN (not for harmonics)
(The aggregation type is not displayed if
MAX
the frequency is 10 s, and flicker)
Measurement output Table Table

Diagram
CSV
Trend Recorder
Query method By time By time

(only for trend recorder query) By event

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Table 9-48 Value View and Evaluation - Records (cont.)
By time Current time Any with calendar function

Start time Time format: depends on date/time
format config.
End time no setting, only display (2 h after start)
By event
Event list Selection of a displayed event
Measurement Source Voltage Voltage
Measurements Va Va, Vb, Vc

Vab, Vbc, Vca

Diagram
CSV
✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click Records.
The Records input/output window opens.
Figure 9-98 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Records Input/Output Window, Measurement Recorder
✧ Select the respective recording settings in the list box according to Table 9-48.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Click Display.
The determined results are displayed in a Find result table. In multi-paged tables you can navigate forward
and back in the pages using the >> and << buttons.
9.4.2.3 Mains Signaling Voltage
Table 9-49 Mains Signaling Voltage
Start time Current time Any with calendar function

Time format: depends on date/time
format config.
End time No setting, only display
Detection time -none- Detailed information generated as

the list in the corresponding data
format depending on the
parameterized data type and mains
signaling frequency.

Diagram
✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click Mains signaling
voltage.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
The Mains signaling voltage input/output window opens.
Figure 9-99 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Mains Signaling Voltage Input/Output Window
✧ Select the respective recording settings in the list box according to Table 9-49.
✧ Click Display.
The detailed results are displayed in a Find result table. In multi-paged tables, you can navigate forward and
back in the pages using the >> and << buttons.
NOTE
In the “Detection time” drag list, it is displayed as “-none-” if no mains signaling voltage record is detected dur-
ing the specified time stamp. The item in the drag list is displayed as “xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx:xxx on YYY Hz”.
The “xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx::xxx” is the trigger time of the mains signaling voltage recording in local time. “YYY”
is the related frequency. You can select any item in the drag list to see the detailed data.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.4 Power Quality Report
Table 9-50 Power Quality Report
Start Time Current time Any with calendar function

End Time Current time Any with calendar function

✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click Power quality
report.
The Power quality report input/output window opens.
Figure 9-100 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Power Quality Report Input/Output Window
✧ Enter the Start time and End time using the calendar function.
✧ Click Generate report.

The report is displayed in a separate window and can be printed out or saved.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.5 File Transfer

You can download the data from the SICAM Q100 in the standard format.
• Trend records: PQDIF files
• Measurements: PQDIF files
The PQDIF file of measurements contains the voltage-event direction and harmonics power direction
since V2.20.
• Measurements: CSV files
• Records for fault recorder: COMTRADE files
• MSV recorder: COMTRADE files
Table 9-51 File Transfer
Start date Current date Any

Calendar function
Time format: YYYY-MM-DD
End date Current date Any

Calendar function
Time format: YYYY-MM-DD
Recorder type Trend recorder (PQDIF) Trend recorder (PQDIF)

Measurement recorder (PQDIF)
Measurement recorder (CSV)
Fault recorder (COMTRADE)
MSV recorder (COMTRADE)
Download type Single file download Single file download

Multiple file download 1)
Recorder list -none- A file is generated as recording list in the

corresponding data format depending on the
parameterized data type and recorder type.
1) Observe the information on how to download multiple files given in this chapter.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
To change the File transfer, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click File transfer.
The File transfer input/output window opens.
Figure 9-101 Value View and Evaluation Tab, File Transfer Input/Output Window
Option: Single file download
✧ Click Download.
The File download dialog opens.
NOTE
The button Download only is displayed if a Record list is available.
✧ Click Save.
✧ Select a directory in the Save dialog and click on Save.
✧ To open or save the recording list, proceed as described in File download → Open.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Option: Multiple File Download via Internet Explorer (Administrator Rights Required)
Preparation
If you want to use the Multiple File Download option, you have to make the following change once with the
Registry Editor of your computer:
✧ Start → Search → regedit → regedit.exe → OK

The Registry Editor opens.
✧ Find in the directory: [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\ActiveX

Compatibility\{00000566-0000-0010-8000-00AA006D2EA4}] \Compatibility Flags
✧ Click on Compatibility Flags and change the value to 0.
Figure 9-102 Changing the Compatibility Flag Value
✧ Confirm with OK.
Figure 9-103 Changed Registry

✧ Close the Registry Editor.
✧ In the Internet-Explorer on menu, select Tools → Internet Options → Security → Trusted Sites.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
If in the Internet-Explorer trust sites are blocked by IE policies, then you proceed as follows:
✧ Start the SICAM Q100.
✧ In the Internet-Explorer on menu, select Tools → Internet Options → Security → Trusted Sites. Click
on Sites button.
✧ Start → Search → regedit → regedit.exe → OK

The Registry Editor opens.
✧ Find in the directory:

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet
Settings\ZoneMap\Ranges]
✧ Insert in the directory a key with the name Rangexxx.
✧ Insert the following 2 values in key:

 Type string:
Name: :Range, Type: REG_SZ, Data: 192.168.0.204
 Type dword:
Name: https, Type: REG_DWORD, Data: 2
Figure 9-104 Registry (Detail)
✧ Check the following entry after closing the registry in the tab Information in the status line:
Trusted sites I Protected Mode: Off

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Multiple File Download
✧ On the Record list, select the files using the normal MS Windows method.
Figure 9-105 File Selection
✧ Enter a Save directory for file storage or select a path for file storage at Select Directory.
✧ Click on Download.
The download progress is indicated and the selected files are stored in the specified directory.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Visualizing the Transmitted Recorder Data
You can display the transmitted recorder data with the help of other programs. Use the following programs for
that:
• SIGRA: COMTRADE files of the fault recorder
Contact the Siemens Hotline for information on that; see Preface.
• SIGRAPlugin: HTML data of the event recorder and recorder values on recorder page
Contact the Siemens Hotline for information on that; see Preface.
• PQDiffractor: PQDIF files of the trend recorder and measurement recorder

Download the program from the Internet: http://www.pqview.com/download-pqdif/

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Option: Multiple File Download via Chrome
The screenshots related with Chrome in this chapter are taken from Chrome V71.0.3578.98 (Official Build)
(64–bit).
Selecting Path via Chrome
✧ Start Google Chrome.
✧ Click Customize and control Google Chrome → Settings.
Figure 9-106 Chrome Settings

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Click Advanced.
Figure 9-107 Advanced Settings
✧ Click Change under Downloads to select the path for saving the download file.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Do not select the Ask where to save each file before downloading.
Figure 9-108 Change the Path for Download Files
✧ Click OK.
Downloading Multiple Files
NOTE
The Record List of Multiple File Download with Chrome is identical for trend recorder, measurement
recorder, and waveform recorder.
If you select the Multiple file download as a download type, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Select the multiple files in the Record list.
Figure 9-109 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Download Multiple Files (for Example Trend Recorder)
✧ Click Download.
The selected files are stored in the configured path directly.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Multiple File Download via Firefox
The screenshots related with Firefox in this chapter are taken from Firefox V52.5.0 (32–bit).
Parameterization of Firefox
✧ Start Firefox.
✧ Click Open menu → Help → Troubleshooting Information.
✧ Change the security settings.
Figure 9-110 Troubleshooting Information

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Click Open Folder.
Figure 9-111 Open Folder
✧ Open the mimeTypes.rdf file with a text-editor tool (for example Notepad) in the opened folder.
✧ Add the following content to the mimeTypes.rdf file at the end and save it.
You can find the text in the Appendix Config File for Multiple File Download via Firefox.
Figure 9-112 Add New Contents

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Selecting Path via Firefox
✧ Click Open menu → Options.
Figure 9-113 Select Options

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Click Browse… to select the path for saving the download file.
Figure 9-114 Select Path
✧ Click Select Folder.
Downloading Multiple Files
The steps are the same as those for Downloading Multiple Files in Multiple File Download via Chrome.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.6 Memory Management

Memory management shows the current utilization (Used ratio) of the storage capacity for the individual
recorders.
To display the Used ratio on the screen, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Evaluation and data management menu and click Memory
management.
The Memory management input/output window opens.
Figure 9-115 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Memory Management Input/Output Window

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.4.2.7 Transient Detection

In Transient detection, the occurrence of transient events is displayed in a table for evaluation.
To display the transient events on the screen, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, click the Evaluation and data management menu and the menu item
Transient detection.
Figure 9-116 Value View and Evaluation Tab, Transient Detection Input/Output Window
NOTE
The last 255 transient events are displayed; older transient events are deleted automatically.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5 Maintenance
In the Maintenance tab you can start the following functions:
• Update the firmware
• Format SD card
• Make various presettings
• View and delete logs
• View and delete transients
• Analyze protocol-specific communication data
If you want to edit this tab, you need the Maintenance password.
To open the Maintenance tab, proceed as follows:
✧ Select the Maintenance tab on the user interface.
Figure 9-117 Maintenance Tab

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.1 Firmware Upload

During a firmware update, the device firmware, the default set of parameters, text libraries, HTML files or parts
thereof are updated.
NOTE
Before updating the firmware, Siemens recommends saving the current parameters set as described in section
Activating the Set of Parameters.
NOTE
100 English characters. Otherwise, the firmware in your device will not be updated.
9.5.1.1 Firmware Upload via User Interface
NOTE
Do not switch off the supply voltage during the firmware upload process.
If you want to carry out a firmware update, you must stop the recording before manually.
To update the firmware in the Maintenance tab, proceed as follows:
✧ Select Firmware upload in the navigation window.
Figure 9-118 Maintenance Tab, Firmware Upload - Enable Upload Input/Output Window
✧ Click Enable upload.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
✧ Follow the notes in the following indication:
The Firmware processing dialog opens.
Figure 9-119 Maintenance Tab, Firmware Processing - Open Input/Output Window
✧ Click Browse... in the section Firmware upload.

The Choose file dialog opens.
✧ Select the desired upload file (extension .pck or .cms depending on the current firmware version) in the
directory.
✧ Click Open.
The selected path is inserted in the Browse... field.
✧ Click Open.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
Follow the notes in the following indication:
Figure 9-120 Firmware-Upload Indication When Loading a .cms File
After approximately 2 min, the device restarts automatically and the Log on tab appears for reconnection with
the device. The device firmware, default settings of parameters, text libraries, HTML files, or parts thereof are
uploaded.
You can find the firmware package in the download area in the Siemens Internet:
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109743592/?en-US.
To upgrade the firmware to the latest version, select the following upload file:
• File with extension .cms for upgrade from version V1.30 or higher to the latest version
NOTE
A file with extension .cms includes a digital signature that protects the integrity and authenticity of the
firmware package.
If the firmware upload fails an error message is shown on the user interface. Following are some causes of
failure:
• Invalid file extension
• Invalid digital signature
• Decoding failure
9.5.1.2 Abort Firmware Upload

If you do not want to update the firmware, click Abort in the section Abort firmware upload.
Follow the notes in the following indication:
Figure 9-121 Firmware-Upload Indication, Abort
SICAM Q100 will be restarted after 20 s in application mode.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.2 Formatting the SD Card
NOTE
When you format the SD card, all recorded data will get lost. If you want to preserve the data, save them before
formatting as described in chapter 9.4.2.1, and chapter 9.4.2.5.
If you want to format the SD card, proceed as follows:
✧ Select Format SD card in the navigation window.
Figure 9-122 Maintenance Tab, Format SD card
✧ Click Format SD card.

The SD card is formatted and the following message appears:
Figure 9-123 Maintenance Tab, Format SC card Completed
✧ Follow the instructions in the message.
Observe messages appear if no SD card or a faulty SD card is used.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.3 Presets
9.5.3.1 Counters (Energy Counters)

To display and reset the energy counters, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Presets menu and click Counters.
Figure 9-124 Maintenance Tab, Preset Counters
✧ Click Reset energy counters.

The Counter ticks, the calculated Energy value and the corresponding Quality bits are reset for all
energy counters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.3.2 Date/Time
To set the date and time, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Presets menu and click Date/time.
Figure 9-125 Maintenance Tab, Preset Date/time
✧ You can either get the date and time from the connected computer or adjust it manually.
Get PC Date and Time
✧ In the input/output window, click Get PC date/time.

The computer time is displayed in the fields of the input/output window and applied in the device.
Setting the Date and Time Manually (24-hour format)
✧ In the input/output window enter the desired time into the fields Day (format dd), Month (format mm), Year
(format yyyy), Hour (format hh), and Minute (format mm).
✧ Click Set Date/time.

The time you have entered is displayed in the fields of the input/output window and applied in the device.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.3.3 Min/Max Values

To reset the min/max values, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Presets menu and click Min/Max Values.
Figure 9-126 Maintenance Tab, Preset Min/Max Values
✧ Click Reset Min/Max Values.

All min/max values are reset. The Action was successful indication is displayed on the status bar.

To reset the load profile, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Presets menu and click Load profile.
Figure 9-127 Maintenance Tab, Preset Load Profile
✧ Click Delete load profile buffer.

The load profile buffer is deleted. The Action was successful indication is displayed on the status bar.
9.5.3.5 Events
To reset the PQ events, proceed as follows:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
✧ In the navigation window, select the Presets menu and click Events.
Figure 9-128 Maintenance Tab, Events Default Setting
✧ Select the events you want to reset using the option fields.
✧ Click Reset PQ events.

The selected PQ events are reset. The Action was successful indication is displayed on the status bar.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.4 Message Logs
9.5.4.1 Operational Log

To view and clear the Operational log (max. 128), proceed as follows:
NOTE
The last 128 operational indications are displayed, older indications are automatically deleted.
✧ In the navigation window, select the Message Logs menu and click Operational log.
Figure 9-129 Maintenance Tab, Delete Log
✧ Click Delete log in the input/output window.

All operational indications in the input/output window are deleted without backup. The indication no. 0001
appears in the log list: Clear Operational Log.
NOTE
If you need the operational indications, for example for subsequent analysis, save or print them out.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.4.2 Error Log
NOTE
Error messages are service information that you quote to the service department upon request in case of an
error.
To view and clear the Error log (max. 128), proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Message Logs menu and click Error log.
Figure 9-130 Maintenance Tab, Delete Error Log
✧ Click Delete log in the input/output window.

All error messages in the input/output window are deleted without backup. The indication no. 0001
appears in the log list: ***Error Log Cleared***.
NOTE
If you need the error messages, for example for subsequent analysis, save or print them out.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.4.3 Audit Log
NOTE
The function Audit Log is only applicable to the SICAM Q100 firmware V2.00 and higher.
The device provides an audit log to track the security-relevant events. The audit log can only be viewed by a
user assigned with the role of Security Auditor.
NOTE
The audit log is only available via HTML pages, not via the device display.
The audit log stores the latest 2048 audit messages. The older messages are automatically overwritten.
You cannot delete the audit messages manually.
For a new delivered device, audit logs created during production process are kept.
The Audit log is located in the Maintenance tab. To view the Audit log, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select the Message logs → Audit log.

Audit messages are displayed on the HTML pages.
Figure 9-131 Maintenance Tab, Display Audit Log
To refresh the display of the audit log, click Audit log or press F5.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
The following table shows examples of events logged in the audit log.
Table 9-52 Audit-Log Events in SICAM Q100
Event Type Description
Modification of security-relevant Modify following settings:

parameterization • IP address
• Modbus TCP access rights for port 502
• Modbus TCP access rights for user port
• Modbus RTU access rights
• Device name
Firmware update Upload new firmware to the device
Logon succeeded The correct user name and password are entered.
Logon failed Incorrect user name and password have been entered for the
times configured by the maximum consecutive attempts in the
chapter 6.3.2.
Value forcing Delete or reset the following data:

• Operational log, error log, and transient log
• Min/max values
• Load profile
• Energy counters
• Events like voltage event, frequency event, voltage-
unbalance event, MSV event, RVC event
Configuration access Upload a configuration file or start configuration
Configuration change Change the configuration
Audit log access Access the audit log
Time/date change Change the time or the date
Device reboot Device is rebooted due to:

• Firmware upload
• SD-card formatting
• IP-address change
• Default-gateway change
• Subnet-mask change
• Default IP setting change
• User-language change
• Network-type change
• IED-name change
• IEC 61850 enable
• Power-quality values for PN and PP setting change
• Voltage RMS value PN and PP setting change
SD card plugged Plug in an SD card
SD card unplugged Unplug the SD card
Default IP set Request the default IP address by pressing key F4 on the

device display for 5 s

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
Table 9-52 Audit-Log Events in SICAM Q100
Event Type Description
Session terminated Interactive session terminates due to time-out or session

limitation
Manually log off Log off manually
Capacity warning The storage capacity of the security audit decreases below the
threshold.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.5 Evaluation and Data Management – Transient Detection

To display and delete the transient events, proceed as follows:
NOTE
The last 255 transient events are displayed; older transient events are deleted automatically.
✧ In the navigation window, click the Value view and evaluation menu and the menu item Transient
detection.
Figure 9-132 Maintenance Tab, Delete Transient Events
✧ Click Delete events in the input/output window.

All transient events in the input/output window are deleted without backup. The indication no. 0001
appears in the log list: Transient events deleted. The indication Action was successful appears in the
status bar.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6 Diagnosis
9.5.6.1 Diagnosis Modbus TCP
NOTE
The diagnostics data of Modbus TCP are displayed only if this bus protocol has been selected in the tab
Configure Menu Administrative Element Ethernet communication.
If the protocol has not been selected, the Diagnosis Modbus TCP input/output window displays -none-.
✧ In the navigation window, select the Diagnosis menu and click Modbus TCP.
The Modbus TCP input/output window opens and the Modbus TCP protocol is displayed. For Modbus
TCP the Standard server, the User-port server and the Connection data are analyzed.
Figure 9-133 Maintenance Tab, Diagnosis Modbus TCP Input/Output Window
✧ To clear the counters for Modbus TCP, click Clear counters.

All counters for Modbus TCP are reset to 0.
NOTE
For further explanations on Modbus TCP diagnostics, refer to the System Manual SICAM Q100.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6.2 Diagnosis Modbus RTU Master
NOTE
The diagnostics data of Modbus RTU Master are displayed only if this bus protocol has been selected in the
tab Configure Menu Administrative Element Serial communication.
If this bus protocol has not been selected, the menu option for selecting the Modbus RTU Master diagnostics
data is not available.
✧ In the navigation window, click the Diagnosis menu and the menu item Modbus RTU Master.
The input/output window of the Modbus RTU Master opens and the Modbus RTU Master protocol is
displayed. The diagnosis for Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway provides the following
information:
 Check of the state of the serial communication with telegram and error counters and an overview of
the set serial interface parameters.
 Overview of what request telegrams are sent by the Modbus RTU Master including request status for
every telegram.
 Overview of the last 5 telegrams sent by Modbus Gateway (only available if the Modbus Gateway
function has been activated).
 Overview of the last 8 sent commands
Figure 9-134 Maintenance Tab, Diagnosis Modbus RTU Master Input/Output Window
✧ To clear the counters for Modbus RTU Master, click Clear counters.
All counters for Modbus RTU Master are reset to 0.
NOTE
The system manual gives more details about diagnosing Modbus RTU Master.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6.3 Diagnosis IEC 61850
NOTE
The diagnostics data of IEC 61850 are only displayed if this bus protocol has been selected in Configure →
Administrative → Communication Ethernet.
If no protocol is selected, the Diagnosis IEC 61850 input/output window shows the entry -none-.
✧ In the navigation window, select the Diagnosis menu and click IEC 61850.
The IEC 61850 input/output window opens and the protocol is displayed. The Ethernet interface is then
analyzed.
Figure 9-135 Maintenance Tab, Diagnosis IEC 61850 Input/Output Window
NOTE
The system manual provides more details on diagnosing IEC 61850.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6.4 OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
NOTE
The diagnostic data of OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) is displayed only if you have activated OPC UA PubSub
(MQTT) in Configure Administrative Communication Ethernet.
If you have not activated OPC UA PubSub (MQTT), the option OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) is invisible under
Diagnosis in the navigation window.
✧ In the navigation window, select the Diagnosis menu and click OPC UA PubSub (MQTT).
The OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) input/output window opens. The diagnostic data of OPC UA PubSub
(MQTT) is then analyzed.
Figure 9-136 Maintenance Tab, Diagnosis OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Input/Output Window
Broker and Network

The Broker and network section shows the following information:
Table 9-53 Information in the Broker and Network Section
Parameter Information
Broker IP address or host name Configured
Topic name Configured

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
Table 9-53 Information in the Broker and Network Section
Parameter Information
DNS server IP address The field is empty if the broker IP address is shown in Broker IP
address or host name.
Publisher ID Identification of the device in the cloud server
Data transmission The number of transmitted data points with different types, depending
on the configuration
Status
This Status section shows the status or errors of the connection to the MQTT Broker. It consists of the status
or errors and additional information if available.
Table 9-54 Status Type
Status or Error Additional Information Description and Solution
Device date and time are - Set the date and time of the device or check
invalid. the NTP time synchronization.
No certificates loaded. - Upload certificates for MQTT communication.
Broker IP address or host - Configure an IP address or a host name for the

name is missing. broker.
DNS server IP address is - If you have configured a host name for the
missing. broker, you must configure a DNS server
address.
Trying to receive the broker IP - The IP address of the broker is requested via
address via DNS DNS.
DNS response time-out There is an error or no response from the DNS

DNS error server.
Check the communication line and IP address
of the DNS server.
Trying to connect to the broker - The IP address of the broker is known. The
device tries to connect to the broker.
Connection time-out Connection error

Connection error Check the communication line and firewall
settings or whether the broker is online.
TLS handshake alert: An error described in <alert> occurs during the

<alert> TLS handshake.
Check the loaded certificates.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
Table 9-54 Status Type
Status or Error Additional Information Description and Solution
Connected to the broker, - Connection is established and data is sent to

publishing data the broker.
Disconnected from the broker, - Connection to the broker is interrupted. The

trying to reconnect device tries to reconnect to the broker.
Connection time-out Connection error

Connection error Check the communication line and firewall
settings or whether the broker is online.
Connection Statistics
The Connection statistics section shows the number of sent and received messages that can be additionally
used for communication-status analysis.
Table 9-55 Connection Statistics
Statistic Counter Description
MQTT
Connect Times that the device connects to the broker
Sent messages The number of sent messages on MQTT level to the broker
Disconnect Times that the device disconnects to the broker
OPC UA PubSub
Key frames The number of sent key frames
Meta frames The number of sent meta frames
Keep alive The number of sent keep-alive messages
File transfer Ok/Err The number of successful or unsuccessful sent files
Delta frames sum The sum number of sent delta frames
Delta frams per s The number of delta frames sent in last second
Certificates Information
The Certificates information section shows the identification and the effective dates for each of the loaded
certificates.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6.5 Customer Support Functions
Diagnosis
The SICAM Q100 firmware is able to execute and provide certain diagnostic and test functions. These functions
are deactivated by default. It is only necessary to activate these functions via the diagnostic function if you
assume the device is not working as expected and you have contacted the Siemens Energy Customer Support
Center to get additional diagnostic information on the device status.
NOTE
Activate the following functions only on request of the Siemens Energy Customer Support Center.
Figure 9-137 Maintenance Tab, Customer Support Functions
To change the Function activation settings in the Maintenance tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Diagnosis and click Customer support functions.
✧ Select yes for the Activate diagnosis function 1 or 2.
Table 9-56 Settings for Customer Support Functions
Parameter Default Setting Setting Options Description
Activate diagnosis no no Activate the HTTP diagnosis server on port

function 1 yes 8080 with additional diagnosis pages.
Activate diagnosis no no Activate the access to the device test

function 2 yes functions for factory internal tests.
✧ Click Send.
✧ Read the data via the internal diagnosis server or use the device test functions via Modbus and inform the
Siemens Energy Customer Support Center.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
✧ Select no for the Activate diagnosis function 1 and 2.
One Click to Customer Care
The SICAM Q100 device provides a fast way to get support from Siemens. To reduce the efforts for getting fast
and comprehensive support, you can collect the relevant data to generate a file by a click and send it to
Siemens Energy Customer Support Center via the Secure File Exchange for customer support.
Figure 9-138 Maintenance Tab, One Click to Customer Care
To collect and send the relevant data in the Maintenance tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Diagnosis and click One click to customer care.
✧ Click Save under One click to customer care.
✧ Save the file into a destination folder.
✧ Send the file to Siemens Energy Customer Support Center via the Secure File Exchange.
The file saved from One click to customer care contains 5 subfiles inside. They are respectively the device
information, Ethernet statistics, the configuration file, the runtime statistics and the syslog.
Figure 9-139 Files Saved from One Click to Customer Care

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
9.5.6.6 SNTP
If you select Ethernet NTP as the Source time synchronization, configure the relevant parameters correctly,
and activate them, the entry SNTP is visible under the Diagnosis menu in the navigation window of
Maintenance.
Figure 9-140 SNTP Menu, Maintenance
To view the SNTP diagnosis in the Maintenance tab, proceed as follows:
✧ In the navigation window, select Diagnosis and click SNTP.
Figure 9-141 Diagnosis, SNTP

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
The following messages are listed in the tables and the meaning of each column is explained here:
Parameter Meaning
NTP servers general information
No. Serial number
Peer IP address of the NTP server configured in the Time synchronization tab
Active The NTP server is active or not.
Alarm The device receives an error indication from the configured NTP server or not.
Stratum The level of the reference clock:

• 1 = the time server directly connects to a time reference (for example, GPS,
PPS).
• 2 to 15 = the time server is synchronized via network.
Reference ID The time reference of the NTP server (for example, GPS or PPS for stratum 1 server,
and IP address for other stratums)
Last sync. [s] The time duration since last synchronization
Current time Current time
Primary NTP server/Secondary NTP server
No. Serial number
Offset [μs] The difference between the new time and the device time. If the value is positive, the
server is faster.
Delay [μs] Round-trip delay
Receive time The time received from the primary/secondary NTP server
NOTE
The table of Primary NTP server or Secondary NTP server lists the latest 10 telegrams. The older telegrams
are automatically overwritten. You cannot delete the telegrams manually.
If no primary or secondary NTP server is configured (IP address 0.0.0.0 is entered during the time-
synchronization configuration),
• A corresponding message (No Primary NTP server configured. or No Secondary NTP server
configured.) appears in the table of NTP servers general information.
• A corresponding message (No sync-telegram from Primary NTP server. or No sync-telegram from
Secondary NTP server.) appears in the corresponding table.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.5 Maintenance
Figure 9-142 SNTP Diagnosis, No Secondary NTP Server Configured

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.6 AC Calibration
9.6 AC Calibration
The device comes calibrated from the factory and does not require recalibration throughout its entire service
life.
If the device must be recalibrated, for example, due to unaccountable measured-value deviations, this
recalibration may only be performed by Siemens.
If you assume that SICAM Q100 measurements deviate from the operating values, contact Siemens Energy
Customer Support Center (see Preface) and/or send the device to the respective Siemens representative upon
consultation.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.7 Example of a Parameterization and Measured Value Evaluation
9.7.1 Task Definition

✧ Set the parameters via the Ethernet interface using the default IP address set upon delivery of the device.
✧ Configure SICAM Q100 according to the topology.
✧ Parameterize the indication of a limit violation for Vab > 11 kV with 10 % hysteresis and name the
indication.
✧ Parameterize a binary output that is switched on for the duration of the limit violation.
✧ Communicate via serial communication using device address 1, with a baud rate of 19.2 kbit/s, even
parity, full access rights, and a monitoring time of 1 min.
✧ Parameterize the Ethernet communication according to the network configuration specified by the system
operator.
✧ Assign any name and specify the time/date format as YYYY-MM-DD and the time in 24-hour format.
✧ Parameterize the Measurement recorder with an averaging time of 2 hours and activate the averaging
recorders for minimum and maximum values. Record all voltage harmonics.
✧ Allocate 50 % storage capacity to the Measurement recorder.
✧ Take over the factory-set report configuration.
✧ Activate the device configuration you have created as the active parameter set.
✧ Perform measurements, acquire the limiting value indication and record the measured values as defined
in the task.
9.7.2 Initial Situation
Topology
• 4-wire system
• Rated input voltage (ph-ph): AC 10 kV
• Rated input current: AC 100 A
• Rated frequency: 50 Hz
• Connection: any load via transformers
• Voltage transformer: 10 000 V : 100 V
• Current transformer: 100 A : 1 A
• Primary nominal voltage: 230.00 V
• Communication via Ethernet and RS485 interfaces
Network Configuration
• Default IP address: 192.168.0.55
• User IP address: 192.168.1.40 (customer-specific)
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: 192.168.1.1

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Features of the SICAM Q100

• 4 inputs for alternating current measurements
• 4 inputs for alternating voltage measurements
• 2 binary inputs
• 2 binary outputs
• Standard interface: Ethernet with Modbus TCP protocol
• Serial interface: RS485 with Modbus RTU protocol
• 4 LEDs for displaying operating states
• Recorder
Connection Diagram
a a a
b b b
B B B
PE
A A A
je 10 A
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
a
P1 P2
b P1 P2
c
P1 P2
Figure 9-143 Connection Diagram
Device Terminals Used for Measurements and Communication
Ethernet connection
via RJ45 on the Binary inputs
device top side
RS485
Current interface
measuring
inputs s
Voltage measuring
inputs
Supply
voltage
Figure 9-144 Terminals and Interfaces Used at the Device

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.7.3 Parameterization as Defined by the Task
Requirements
SICAM Q100 is electrically connected to the system and commissioned as described in chapter 7.7. Rated
voltages and currents at the measuring inputs are switched off.
Parameterization
NOTE
If you change settings in tabs, click Send on each tab to confirm the new setting. The settings are activated
only after the entire parameterization has been completed.
✧ Start the user interface as described in chapter 9.2.1 (initial startup) or chapter 9.2.7 (start during
operation). Use the factory-preset IP address for this purpose.
✧ On the Configure tab, configure the element AC measurement (see chapter 9.3.3.1.1) according to the
following topology specifications:
Figure 9-145 Configure Tab, AC Measurement Example
NOTE
If you are using Ethernet communication with IEC 61850 bus protocol (chapter 9.3.7.2) and change the
Network type, the device will restart.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Configure a limit violation indication on the Configure tab, Limits 1-8 item (see chapter 9.3.3.2) as
follows:
Figure 9-146 Configure Tab, Limits Example
✧ Configure binary output G1/2 on the Configure tab, Binary outputs item (see chapter 9.3.3.1.3) as
follows:
Figure 9-147 Configure Tab, Binary Outputs Example

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ On the Configure tab configure the Serial communication menu item (see chapter 9.3.7.3) as follows:
Figure 9-148 Configure Tab, Serial Communication Example
✧ On the Configure tab set the Communication Ethernet menu item (see chapter 9.3.7.2) according to
the configuration specified by the system operator, for example as follows:
Figure 9-149 Configure Tab, Communication Ethernet Example

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ On the Configure tab, Device and language menu item assign a device name and the format for the date
and time display on the HTML pages as described in chapter 9.3.7.7.
Figure 9-150 Configure Tab, Device and Language Example
✧ On the Configure tab, Recorder management menu item (see chapter 9.3.6.3), configure the
Measurement recorder with an averaging time of 2 hours and the recorders of average to record all
voltage harmonics.
Figure 9-151 Configure Tab, Recorder Management Example

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ On the Configure tab, Memory management menu item (see chapter 9.4.2.6) allocate 50 % of the
storage capacity to the Measurement recorder and activate the ring buffer function.
Figure 9-152 Configure Tab, Memory Management Example
✧ Confirm the factory-set report configuration (see chapter 9.3.6.6).
✧ On the Configure tab, Recording control menu item (see chapter 9.3.6.7) select Start immediately.
Figure 9-153 Configure Tab, Start Immediately Example
✧ Go to the Configure tab, Save configuration to file menu item to save your device configuration as the
active parameter set as described in Save Configuration to File.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
✧ Enable the active parameter set in the device as described in Activating the Set of Parameters.
NOTE
After changing the network settings and subsequent parameter activation the device will reset.
9.7.4 Performing the Measurement

✧ Switch on the rated voltages and rated currents at the measuring inputs E and F of SICAM Q100
observing the safety notes given in chapter 7.7.
✧ Read the measured values from the Value view and Evaluation tab by calling the Operational
parameters, Harmonics, AC power and energy, Binary outputs and Limits menu items according to
chapter 9.4 in the navigation window.
The user interface displays the status of binary output G1/2 which corresponds to the parameterized
indication Vab_>11kV.
If the parameterized limit of the voltage Vab is exceeded, a corresponding limit violation indication is
displayed in the table.
NOTE
Measured values and indications are refreshed after 5 s on the Value view and Evaluation tab.
✧ Display the power quality events and the memory utilization on the Value view and Evaluation tab.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
9.8 Flowchart of Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway Parameterization
9.8 Flowchart of Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway

Parameterization
Start
Configure serial communication and select bus [Gateway function Configure Ethernet communication and select bus
protocol "Modbus RTU Master" required?] protocol "Modbus TCP"
User interface: User interface:

Configure: Communicationserial (chapt. 8.3.7.3) Configure: Communication Ethernet(chapt. 8.3.7.2)
[Only Modbus RTU Master required]
Configure Modbus slave device [Also Modbus RTU Configure Modbus Gateway settings
Master required]
Configure: Modbus slave devices (chapt. 8.3.7.4) Configure: Communication Ethernet(chapt. 8.3.7.2.1)
[Another Modbus slave device and different

device type than configured before?]
Configure data mapping for the Modbus slave device [No more Modbus slave
devices to configure]
User interface: Final
Configure: Mapping - Measured values (chapt. 8.3.7.4.2)
Configure: Mapping - Indications (chapt. 8.3.7.4.3)
[Another Modbus slave device from

same type than configured before?]
Import a saved Modbus slave device Export already configured Modbus slave
configuration with mapping information device with mapping information as file

Configure: Mapping - Import (chapt. 8.3.7.4.5) Configure: Mapping - Export (chapt. 8.3.7.4.4)
Figure 9-154 Flowchart of Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway Parameterization

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
10 Operation at Use of the Display
10.1 General Operating Instructions 338
10.2 Starting Operation 340
10.3 Display Content 341
10.4 Parameterization 343

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.1 General Operating Instructions

The SICAM Q100 can be operated both using HTML pages from the connected PC and the softkeys at the
device. This chapter describes the softkey-based operation.
The front softkeys F1 to F4 are used to set parameters, select measured quantities, and enter various settings.
The following table lists the icons which appear on the display when the softkeys are pressed.
Table 10-1 Control Functions of the Softkeys
Softkey Functions F1 F2 F3 F4
General Softkey Functions
Display of the RMS value
Canceling an action and returning to the action

displayed previously
Displaying the maximum value
Displaying the minimum value
Scrolling up
Scrolling down
Menu selection
Acknowledging the selection
Special Softkey Functions
Displaying the table of the value
Displaying the graph
Displaying additional information
Active energy supply
Active energy consumption
Inductive reactive energy

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-1 Control Functions of the Softkeys (cont.)
Softkey Functions F1 F2 F3 F4
Capacitive reactive energy
Scrolling left
Scrolling right
Displaying the next additional information
Switching to edit mode
Exiting edit mode
Increasing the displayed value or switching

forward in the parameter list in edit mode
Reducing the displayed value or switching

backward in the parameter list in edit mode
Switchover the sign

+/-
Switching between selected and non-selected
state (e.g. password protection on  password
protection off)
Table 10-2 Icons in the Title Bar of the Display
Icon Definition
The device is password-protected.
The device password was entered correctly and the device is unlocked.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.2 Starting Operation
10.2 Starting Operation

Before starting the device, the following preconditions must be satisfied:
✧ Mount the SICAM Q100 as described in chapter 7.2.
✧ Connect the lines for measurement, communication and supply voltage as described in chapter 7.3 and
observe the safety provisions.
✧ Switch on the devices needed for the measurement.
✧ Switch on the supply voltage of the SICAM Q100.
✧ Check whether the LEDs at the SICAM Q100 signal that the device is ready (see chapter 13.2).
The following picture is displayed while the device is being initialized after switching on the supply voltage:
Figure 10-1 Start Screen
Once the device has initialized, the currently selected screen with measured values is displayed.
NOTE
The following pictures only show the display without the front view of the device.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.3 Display Content
Display of the Menus
In the main menu all submenus are listed on the display:
Title
Menu/submenu Password icon Display number
Diagnostics Scroll bar
Submenu
Settings
Start/end
of the list
Selectable measured
quantities
Selected
Current functions display
of the softkeys
Figure 10-2 Display Content
The display can be switched between inverse mode and non-inverse mode, see chapter 10.4.4, submenu
display number 32.7: Display).
Display of Measured Values
Measured values are displayed as follows:
Voltage ph -n 1.0
a 230.01 V
III I
b 231.03 V
c 229.98 V
n 7.23 V
Max   Menu
Figure 10-3 Display of Measured Values

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Display of Bar Charts
Bar charts are displayed as follows:
Harm. voltage 15.0
[%]
III I
0.2
0.1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Max   Menu

Figure 10-4 Bar Chart Display
Display of Phasor Diagrams
Phasor diagrams are displayed as follows:
Phasor diagram 14.0

III I
Vc
Va
Vb
Tab.   Menü

Figure 10-5 Display of Phasor Diagrams

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.4 Parameterization
Softkeys F1 to F4 are used for parameterization taking the display content into consideration. Proceed as
described in the following menus.
NOTE
Remember that the parameterization on the device is subject to restrictions. Full parameterization requires a
PC and the HTML pages.
10.4.1 Menu Tree of the Main Menu
   
   
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Voltage Voltage Current Active power
Vph-n Vph-ph I P (W)
   
   
5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
React. power App. power Total power Power factor
Q1 (var) S (VA) P, Q1, S PF
   
   
9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0
Tot. pwr.factor Disp. angles Frequency THDS voltage
PF tot Hz THDS-V
   
   
13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0
THDS current Harm. voltage Harm. current
Phasor diagram
THDS-I V I
   
   
17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0
Active energy React. energy App. energy Active factor
Wh varh VAh cos 
   
   
21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0
Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 3 Tariff 4
   
   
25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0
Tariff 5 Tariff 6 Tariff 7 Tariff 8
   
   
29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0
Short flicker Short flicker Long flicker Long flicker
ph-n ph-ph ph-n ph-ph
   
  
33.0 34.0 50.0 60.0

Phase unbal. Binary in-/ Operation log PQ events

Vnb, Inb outputs state


35.0 to 38.0 
 80.0
User def. Settings
Screens 1 to 4
Figure 10-6 Menu Tree of the Main Menu
NOTE
The user-defined screens (35.0 through 38.0) are only visible on the display if they were activated using the
HTML pages (see chapter 9.3.4.2).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.4.2 Measured Quantities Submenus
NOTE
To return to the main menu from within any submenu, press the F4 Menu softkey.
Submenu Display Number 1 through 11, 20 and 33: Measured Quantities

• Voltage Vph-n, Voltage Vph-ph
• Current I
• Active Power P, React. Power Q, App. Power S, Total Power P, Q, S
• Power factor PF, Tot. Pwr.factor PF tot
• Disp. angles
• Frequency
• Active factor cos j
Enter Max Min Inst.
1 to 11, 20, 33 1.0 to 11.0, 20.0, 33.0 1.1 to 11.1, 20.1, 33.1 1.2 to 11.2, 20.2, 33.2
Measurement Instantaneous Maximum Minimum

measurement
Menu
Figure 10-7 Submenus of the Display Numbers 1 to 11, 20 and 33, Various Measured Quantities
Submenu Display Number 12 and 13: THDS Voltage and THDS Current
Enter Max Inst.

12, 13 12.0, 13.0 12.1, 13.1
THDS-V THDS-Vph-n THDS-Vph-n max
THDS-I THDS-I THDS-I max
Menu
Figure 10-8 Submenu Display Number 12 and 13, THDS V and THDS I
Submenu Display Number 14: Phasor Diagram
Enter Tab. Graph
14 14.0 14.1
Graphic Table
Phasor diagram
Phasor diagram Phasor diagram
Menu
Figure 10-9 Submenu Display Number 14, Phasor Diagram

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 15 and 16: Harmonics V and Harmonics I (Bar Charts)
Enter Max Inst.
15, 16 15.0, 16.0 15.1, 16.1

Harm. voltage V Harm. voltage Harm. voltage max
Harm. current I Harm. current Harm. current max
Info
Selection of
ESC 15.2, 16.2 harmonics

Details to all
harmonics
Details
Menu
Figure 10-10 Submenu Display Number 15 and 16, Harmonics V and Harmonics I
Submenu Display Number 17: Active Energy
Enter DMD SUP
17 17.0 17.1
Active energy Active energy Active energy
Wh sup dmd
Menu
Figure 10-11 Submenu Display Number 17, Active Energy
Submenu Display Number 18: Reactive Energy
Enter CAP IND
18 18.0 18.1
React. energy React. energy React. energy
varh ind. cap.
Menu
Figure 10-12 Submenu Display Number 18, Reactive Energy
Submenu Display Number 19: Apparent Energy
Enter Menu
19 19.0
App. energy Apparent energy
VAh Values
Figure 10-13 Submenu Display Number 19, Apparent Energy

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 21 to 28: Tariff 1 to Tariff 8
Enter Menu
21 to 28 21.0 to 28.0
Tariff 1 to Tariff 8 Tariff 1 to Tariff 8
Figure 10-14 Submenu Display Number 21 to 28, Tariff 1 to Tariff 8
Submenu Display Number 29 to 32: Flicker
Menu
29.0 29.0
Short flicker Pst ph-n
ph-n a, b, c
Enter
30.0 30.0
Short flicker Pst ph-ph
ph-ph ab, bc, ca
31.0 31.0
Long flicker Plt ph-n
ph-n a, b, c
32.0 32.0
Long flicker Plt ph-ph
ph-ph ab, bc, ca
Figure 10-15 Submenu Display Number 29 to 32, Flicker
Submenu Display Number 34: Binary in-/outputs
Enter Menu
34 34.0
Binary in-/ State I/O:
outputs state BI, BO: Off/On
Figure 10-16 Submenu Display Number 34, Binary In-/Outputs

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.4.3 Submenus for Diagnostics
NOTE
To return to the main menu from within any submenu, press the F1 Esc softkey.
Submenu Display Number 50: Operational Logs


Enter Enter Esc
50 50.0 50.1
Operational logs List of Analysis of
operational logs operational logs
Esc
Figure 10-17 Submenu Display Number 50, Operational Logs
Submenu Display Number 60: PQ Events


Enter Enter Esc
60 60.0 60.1
PQ events List of Analysis of
PQ events PQ events
Esc
Figure 10-18 Submenu Display Number 60, PQ Events

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.4.4 Menu Tree of the Settings Submenu
NOTE
To return to the main menu, press the F1 Esc softkey from within any item of the Settings submenu.
Enter
  
  
80.0 80.1 80.2 80.3
Settings Device Language / Basic
information Regional parameters
80.4
Load profile
  
  
80.8 80.7 80.6 80.5
Advanced Display Communication Date/Time
Figure 10-19 Menu Tree of Submenu 80.0, Settings
NOTE
You cannot make any settings in the Device information 80.1 submenu.
All other submenus will prompt you to enter a password before editing settings when the device has restarted.
Submenu Display Number 80.2: Language/Regional
Edit + Ok
80.2 80.2
Language Deutsch


Enter English
80.2 English
Language /
Regional Edit + Ok
80.2 80.2
Phase labels L1,L2...
Esc a, b, c a,b,c
Figure 10-20 Submenu Display Number 80.2, Language/Regional

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.3: Basic Parameters
 Edit
Enter 
82.0
82.0
Connection type
Voltage inputs Use PTs?
etc.
X
  Edit
Enter  Enter 
80.3 82.1 82.1

Basic Current inputs
Current inputs
parameters Use CTs?
Y
Enter Edit
82.2 82.2
Zero point sup . Zero point sup .
Setting value
+
Esc X or Y Ok -

Select. parameters acc .
to following table
Figure 10-21 Submenu Display Number 80.3, Basic Parameters
NOTE
The selection of the transformers only becomes active after a delay of 5 s.
Table 10-3 Basic Parameter Settings
Parameter Default Setting Setting Range
Voltage Inputs
Connection type 3P4W 1P2W (1-phase system)

3P3WB (three-wire, equal load)
3P3W_2I (three-wire, any load (2*I))
3P3W_3I (three-wire, any load (3*I))
3P4WB (four-wire, equal load)
3P4W (four-wire, any load)
Use PTs? No (no checkmark) Yes (checkmark)

No (no checkmark)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-3 Basic Parameter Settings (cont.)
Use PTs:
PT primary AC 10 000 V AC 100 V to 1 000 000 V
PT secondary AC 100 V AC 1 V to 460 V
Primary nominal voltage 230.00 V AC 57.73 V to 400 V (autorange)

(Phase-N/PE)  IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 230 V:
200 % overvoltage
 > AC 230 V to 400 V: 200 % to 15 %
overvoltage
UL conditions:
 > AC 170 V to 300 V: 200 % to 15 %
overvoltage
Current Inputs
Use CTs? No (no checkmark) Yes (checkmark)

No (no checkmark)
Use CTs:
CT primary AC 1 000.00 A AC 1.00 A to 100 000.00 A
CT secondary AC 1.00 A AC 1.00 A to 10.00 A
Separate CT In1)? No (no checkmark) Yes (checkmark)
No (no checkmark)
Separate CT In?
CT Primary In AC 1 000.00 A AC 1.00 A to 100 000.00 A
Zero-Point Suppression
Zero-point suppression 0.3 % 0.0 % to 10.0 %

(in % of Vrated
and Irated)
1)
Separate CT In is available only if the following Connection type is selected: 3P4W (four-wire, any load).

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.4: Load Profile
NOTE
If you select the Load profile parameter, this note is displayed first:
Changing these parameters resets the load profile!
To confirm, press the softkey F4 (Ok).
Edit
80.4
Sub period time
Edit
80.4

No. of sub
Enter 
periods
80.4
Edit
Load profile
80.4
Sync.source
Edit
80.4
Reactive power
Esc Ok +
-
Select parameters acc .
to following table.
Figure 10-22 Submenu Display Number 80.4, Load Profile
Table 10-4 Load Profile Settings
Subperiod 15 min 1 min to 6 min in 1-min steps, 10 min, 12 min,

Subperiods 1 1 to 5
Sync.source Interne Uhr None

Protocol
BinIn1 (binary input1)
BinIn2 (binary input 2)
Int. clock
Reactive power Q1 Q1
Qn
Qtot

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.5: Date/Time
Edit
80.5
Time source
Edit
80.5
Date

Enter  Edit
80.5 80.5
Date/Time Format
Edit
80.5
Time
Edit
80.5
Time zone
+
Esc Ok -


to following table.
Figure 10-23 Submenu Display Number 80.5, Date/Time
Table 10-5 Date/Time Settings
Time source internal internal

Ethernet NTP
Fieldbus
Date Current date setting according to format
Format YYYY-MM-DD24 YYYY-MM-DD24

YYYY-MM-DD12
DD.MM.YYYY24
DD.MM.YYYY12
MM/DD/YY24
MM/DD/YY12
Time Current time setting according to format
Time zone 00:00 -12 to +13 (hours)


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.6: Communication
Esc Ok
Change the para -

meters acc. to
following table

Enter  Edit
87.0
87.0 MAC addr.
IP Address IP addr.
Subnet
 Gateway
Enter  Enter Edit
80.6 87.1 87.1

Communication Communication Bus protocol:
Ethernet - Modbus TCP
- IEC61850
Enter Edit
87.2 87.2
Communication Bus protocol:
- Modbus RTU
Serial
- Modbus Master
-None
Enter
87.13 87.13
Modbus TCP/ Activated
RTU gateway Not activated
+ 
-


Esc Esc Ok Edit Ok +

Select parameters Working on
acc. to following choice
table.
Figure 10-24 Submenu Display Number 80.6, Communication
NOTE
The MAC address is shown on the display but cannot be edited.
For this purpose, a prompt is displayed which you must acknowledge with Ok.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-6 IP Address Settings
MAC address fixed

0.0.0.0 = DHCP
Subnet 1) 255.255.255.0 Any
Gateway 1) 192.168.0.1 Any
1) After the communication parameters have been changed, the device restarts. For this purpose, a prompt
is displayed which you must acknowledge with Ok.
Table 10-7 Ethernet Communication Settings
Bus protocol Modbus TCP none

Modbus TCP
IEC 61850
Both
Ethernet Communication - Modbus TCP Bus Protocol
Access rights for port 502 full full

read only
Keepalive time 10 s 0 s = switched off

1 s to 65,535 s
Communication monitoring time 600 * 100 ms 0 s = none

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Use user port number 1) No No

Yes
User port number 1) 10 000 10 000 to 65 535

(only settable if Set user port number
is parameterized with yes)
Access right for user port full full

(only settable if Set user port number read only
is parameterized with yes)
Ethernet Communication - IEC 61850 Bus Protocol
IED Name SICAM_Q100_01 read only
Voltage - Deadband 5% 1 % to 5 % in increments of 1 %

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-7 Ethernet Communication Settings (cont.)
Current - Deadband 5% 1 % to 5 % in increments of 1 %
Power - Deadband 5% 1 % to 5 % in increments of 1 %
Power factor - Deadband 5% 2% to 5 % in increments of 1 %
Frequency - Deadband 0,05 0.02 %

0.05 %
1) After enabling the parameter changes, any currently active Modbus TCP connections will be closed. The
Modbus TCP client must later re-open these connections.
Table 10-8 Serial Communication Settings – Modbus RTU and Modbus RTU Master Bus Protocols
Bus protocol Modbus RTU None

Modbus RTU
Modbus Master
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s For the selection, see 16 Operating

Parameters 397
Parity Even For the selection, see 16 Operating

Parameters 397

Read only

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s For the selection, see 16 Operating

Parameters 397
Parity even For the selection, see 16 Operating

Parameters 397
Maximum 3x/4x register gap 10

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-9 Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway Settings
Activated no no
yes
Response timeout 1) 50 ms (1 to 6 000) * 10 ms

= 10 ms to 60 s
1)
These values are necessary if no Modbus slave device has been configured for the requested Unit ID. If
a Modbus slave device was configured, its values are used.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.7: Display
Edit
80.7
Contrast
Edit
80.7
Time until
dimmed

Enter  Edit
80.7 80.7
Display Invert display
Edit
80.7
Refresh time
Enter
80.7
Display test...
F4
View
point raster +
-

Esc Ok

to following table.
Figure 10-25 Submenu Display Number 80.7, Display
Table 10-10 Display Settings
Contrast 8 0 to 10
Invert display No Yes (checkmark)

(no checkmark) No (no checkmark)
Display test View point raster No setting range

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Submenu Display Number 80.8: Advanced
Figure 10-26 Submenu Display Number 80.8, Advanced
Table 10-11 Advanced Settings
Limit Values 1 to 16
Source -none- For the selection, see 16 Operating

Parameters 397
Mode lower than greater than

smaller than
Value 0 -1 000 000 000 to +1 000 000 000 (unit)
Reset hysteresis 1.0 % 0.0 % to 10.0 %
State ON ON
OFF (O)
acc. to current configuration
Record
Record on - Yes (checkmark)

No

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 10-11 Advanced Settings (cont.)
Reset
Clear min/max values - Yes (checkmark)

No
Reset counters - Yes (checkmark)

No
Execute... - Confirm with Enter

(prompt whether selected function is
executed)
Password Protection
If you have selected the option Use password = no on the user interface (see chapter 6.2.2), you can use the
softkeys to parameterize the device without entering a password.
If you have selected the option Use password = yes on the user interface (see chapter 6.2.2), you must first
enter the HIMI password (default setting 000000) before you can edit the device settings. A prompt is displayed
for this purpose.
After you have entered the correct password, you can edit the parameterization using the softkeys within the
next 15 minutes. After this time you have to re-enter the password at the device.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

10.4.5 User-defined Screens Submenus
NOTE
The user-defined screens (35.0 through 38.0) are only visible on the display if they were activated using the
HTML pages (see 9.3.4.2 User-Defined Screens 178).
35.0
User def. ...
screen 1
ENTER MENU
36.0 36.0
User def. Values or
screen 2 bars
37.0
User def. ...
screen 3
38.0
User def. ...
screen 4
Figure 10-27 Submenus User-defined Screens 1 to 4
Depending on which display type was selected, the measured values are displayed numerically or as bars.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
11 Time Synchronization
11.1 General 362
11.2 Internal Time Keeping 362
11.3 External Time Synchronization per NTP 363
11.4 External Time Synchronization via Fieldbus 364
11.5 Internal Time Synchronization via RTC 364

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
11.1 General
11.1 General
During operation, SICAM Q100 needs the date and time for all time-relevant processes. The term time is used
throughout this section to refer to both the date and the time.
The time synchronization in the SICAM Q100 is necessary to guarantee a common time basis for the commu-
nication with peripheral devices and time stamping of the process data.
SICAM Q100 supports both external and internal time synchronization. The type of time synchronization is
specified during the parameterization (see chapter 9.3.7.1). The external time synchronization from an NTP
server is preferred.
11.2 Internal Time Keeping
11.2.1 Time Format

The internal time is kept in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) from 01.01.2000, 00:00 to 31.12.2099, 23:59.
To display the local time, for example on the HTML pages, you can configure a local time correction factor and
the automatic adjustment to daylight saving time during parameterization (see chapter 9.3.7.1).
11.2.2 Status Bits
FAIL Status Bit
The FAIL status bit implemented in the SICAM Q100 signals with "0" that the time is valid and with "1" that the
time is invalid.
The status of the FAIL bit corresponds to the "Clock error" operational indication, see chapter 14.1.
The following table lists the time stamps of events or indications for the displayed operational, error logs, and
audit logs according to status bit set/not set using the example of date 2010-09-26, time 13:49.35246:
Table 11-1 FAIL Status Bit for Time Synchronization via NTP Server
FAIL Output
0 2010-09-26 13:49.35:246
1 2010-09-26 13?49?35?246
DST Status Bit
With "1", the DST status bit implemented in the SICAM Q100 signals that the local daylight saving time is active.
The operational indication "Daylight saving time" is displayed.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
11.3 External Time Synchronization per NTP
11.3 External Time Synchronization per NTP
General
To synchronize the time via an external source, SICAM Q100 is equipped with an SNTP client (SNTP = Simple
Network Time Protocol) that can be connected to 2 NTP servers (NTP = Network Time Protocol), the primary
and the secondary (redundant) NTP server.
The chapter 9.3.7.1 describes how to set the parameters of the 2 servers.
NTP is used for external time synchronization via Ethernet. The SNTP client sends a time request to the NTP
server once a minute. The time synchronization error is ±5 ms referred to UTC time of the NTP server.
The time stamp of the NTP server has a 64-bit format. Counting is accomplished in seconds and fractions of
seconds.
NOTE
The time format is described in detail in the RFC 5905 (Request for Comments 5905 for NTP).
Time Synchronization Procedure
The device was set to external time synchronization (Ethernet NTP) during the parameterization. After switch-
ing on or resetting the device, the FAIL bit is first set to "1" (=invalid) and the device sends a time request to
the NTP server. After receiving the time information from the NTP server via Ethernet, the FAIL bit is set to "0"
(=valid) and the internal timer (RTC) is updated. The SNTP client repeats the time request to the NTP server
cyclically once every minute.
If the primary NTP server fails (for example, no response to a request twice or one of the criteria at "Redundant
NTP server" satisfied) and if the secondary NTP server is operational (always polled in parallel), the device
switches to the secondary NTP server. The FAIL bit remains = 0. In this case, the operational indication "Pri-
mary NTP Server Error" is displayed, see chapter 14.1.
If the secondary NTP server is also invalid, the FAIL bit will be set to 1 after the programmable timer Error in-
dication after has expired, and the "Clock Error" indication is output.
Redundant NTP Servers
The time synchronization supports a primary and a secondary NTP server. Different IP addresses are set for
the two NTP servers, see chapter 9.3.7.1.
SICAM Q100 cyclically polls both NTP servers once every minute, but during normal operation it is synchro-
nized by the primary NTP server. The device automatically switches to the secondary NTP server if one of the
following criteria are met:
• No response from the primary NTP server to 2 successive requests
• The "Alarm" indication is set in the time information of the primary NTP server.
• The primary NTP server responds with 0.
• The message runtime in the network is > 5 ms.
• The stratum of the primary NTP server is 0 (unknown) or > 5.
Switching to the secondary NTP server is prevented if:

• The secondary server does not provide better time information (see criteria that initiate the switch from
primary to secondary NTP server; "Secondary NTP Server Error" indication was already output) or
• The secondary server has recently been available for less than 10 minutes.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
11.4 External Time Synchronization via Fieldbus
In these cases, SICAM Q100 is not external synchronized anymore. The device uses the internal clock (on mil-
liseconds time basis) and the last valid drift. After the programmable time delay, the device reports "Clock Er-
ror", see chapter 14.1.
Switching Back from the Secondary to the Primary NTP Server
While the device is synchronized by the secondary NTP server, it continues to cyclically poll the primary NTP
server. The device will only switch back to the primary NTP server if it receives correct time information and if
none of the criteria for Redundant NTP Servers are fulfilled anymore.
11.4 External Time Synchronization via Fieldbus

The external time synchronization via fieldbus is used if the device is connected to the systems control via pro-
tocol Modbus RTU using the RS485 interface.
The time information can also be transmitted from the systems control via Modbus TCP or IEC 61850 using
Ethernet interface. When using the Ethernet connection, Siemens recommend, however, synchronizing the de-
vice from an NTP server, see chapter 11.3.
When using the external time synchronization via fieldbus, the client should send a message containing the
time information to the device in 1-minute cycles.
The time synchronization error using the Modbus RTU protocol is ±20 ms max.
11.5 Internal Time Synchronization via RTC

Besides external time synchronization, the internal time synchronization is also possible using the battery-buff-
ered RTC (Real Time Clock). Due to the reduced accuracy, RTC should only be used in case of failure or un-
availability of the external time synchronization.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
12 Maintenance, Storage, Transport
12.1 Maintenance 366
12.2 Storage 366
12.3 Transport 366

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

12.1 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance
Except for a battery replacement, the SICAM Q100 is maintenance-free.
Wipe the device using a clean, dry and soft cloth if necessary. Do not use solvents.
The battery change is described in 91.
12.2 Storage
Store the device in a dry and clean location. Store the device within a temperature range from -40 °C to +70 °C
(-40 °F to +158 °F).
The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice formation.
To avoid premature aging of the electrolytic capacitors, store the device within the recommended temperature
range of +10 °C to +35 °C (+50 °F to +95 °F).
Siemens furthermore recommends connecting the device to supply voltage once a year for 1 to 2 days in order
to form the inserted electrolytic capacitors. This procedure should also be carried out before operating the de-
vice.
NOTE
In this context, pay attention to the commissioning notes in 7.7 Commissioning 122.
The Lithium batteries used in Siemens devices are subject to Special Provision 188 of the UN Recommenda-
tions on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations and Special Provision A45 of the IATA Danger-
ous Goods Regulation and the ICAO Technical Instructions. This is only valid for the original battery or original
spare batteries.
12.3 Transport
If devices are to be shipped elsewhere, you can reuse the transport packaging. When using different packag-
ing, you must ensure that the transport requirements according to ISO 2248 are adhered to. The storage pack-
ing of the individual devices is not adequate for transport purposes.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
13 Failures and LED Indications
13.1 General Inspection 368
13.2 Indications Signaled by LEDs 369
13.3 Troubleshooting, Repair, and Fallback Mode 373

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

13.1 General Inspection
13.1 General Inspection
Visual Inspection
If function failures occur, first check the device visually. Observe the following points when inspecting the device
visually:
• Correct installation of the device as described in chapter 7.2 at the intended location
• Compliance with the environmental conditions specified in chapter 14.1.4 of the technical data
• Correct connection of supply voltage and grounding conductors according to chapter 7.3
• Correct connection of measuring and communication lines according to chapter 7.7.1
Function Checks
Additionally, check the following aspects:

• Functioning of the display according to chapter 10.2 and good visibility of the display
• Correct functioning of peripheral devices (e.g. connected PC, series-connected current transformers)
• Compliance with the system requirements specified in chapter 7.4
• Compliance with the access rights according to chapter 7.5
• Compliance with the commissioning sequence of the device according to chapter 7.7
• Evaluation of the LED failure indications, see chapter 13.2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

13.2 Indications Signaled by LEDs

SICAM Q100 automatically monitors the functions of its hardware, software, and firmware components. The
LEDs on the top side of the housing and on the display side (only in devices with display) indicate the current
device status.
Designation of the LEDs on the Top Side of Housing
RUN ERROR
H1 H2
Speed
Link/Activity
Figure 13-1 Designation of the LEDs on the Top Side of Housing
Designation of the LEDs on the Display Side
RUN
ERROR
H1 H2
Figure 13-2 Designation of the LEDs on the Display Side

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Meaning of the LEDs
LED (green, red, yellow): on
LED (green, red, yellow): flashes
C C LEDs H1/H2/ERROR: according to parameterization
LED: off
LED Speed (yellow):
off: 10 Mbit/s
on: 100 Mbit/s
LED Link/Activity (green):
LED on: Ethernet link is up
LED flashing: Ethernet link is up and data is transferred
LED off: no Ethernet partners connected
NOTE
The designations and functions of the LEDs on the top side and on the display side of the housing are identical.
Therefore, only the LEDs on the top side of the housing are described in the following table.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 13-1 Indications Signaled by LEDs on the Top Side of the Housing
LED Meaning
No Operation
RUN ERROR Device is switched off.
H1 H2
RUN ERROR Device is switched on, but firmware is not loaded.
H1 H2
or
Device is in startup phase.
Normal Operation
RUN ERROR
Configured IP address is used.
or
IP address is received via DHCP.
H1 H2
H1 and H2 LEDs are configured.
C C
Normal operation with default IP address

RUN ERROR
The default IP address was requested by pressing the F4 softkey during
normal operation.
H1 H2
C C
Double IP address has been detected in the network.

RUN ERROR
ERROR
The device is in operation but cannot be reached via Ethernet.
Solve this network configuration issue and restart the device.
H1 H2
Each device must have a unique IP address.
C C
RUN ERROR
ERROR
An IP address request via DHCP is in progress.
ERROR = off, H1 and H2 LEDs according to configuration
H1 H2
RUN LED stops flashing when IP address is received.
C C
The device runs into the Fallback mode after an unresolvable error in normal
operation occurs or by pressing the F4 softkey during device startup.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Table 13-1 Indications Signaled by LEDs on the Top Side of the Housing (cont.)
LED Meaning
Fallback Mode
Fallback mode with default IP address

Default IP address was requested by pressing the F4 softkey during
Fallback
mode.
Firmware Upload
HTTPS certificate is being generated after the IP address is changed.

RUN ERROR
H1 H2

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

13.3 Troubleshooting, Repair, and Fallback Mode
13.3.1 Troubleshooting and Repair
General Troubleshooting
You are not authorized to troubleshoot the defective device beyond the measures described in chapter 13 and
make repairs yourself. Special electronic modules are inserted in the SICAM Q100 which can only be replaced
by the manufacturer according to the guidelines for Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).
If you suspect any damage on the device, Siemens recommends sending the entire device to the manufacturer.
For this purpose, it is best to use the original transport packaging or similar packaging.
Troubleshooting Based on Error Messages
NOTE
Error messages are service information that you quote to the service department upon request in case of an
error.
The error messages can be saved or printed out.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

13.3.2 Fallback Mode
13.3.2.1 Functional Description

The firmware of the SICAM Q100 contains a complete application for the operation of the device and runs in 2
modifications, depending on the operating state:
• Normal operation: complete functional scope
• Fallback mode: minimum functional scope
The fallback mode is started automatically in case of severe system errors during the device start. Once the
fallback mode is started, the indication FALLBACK appears on the device display.
The user interface Fallback mode opens in the browser. You can see and save different device information for
fault analysis in the tabs. Furthermore, you can start different maintenance functions.
Fallback Mode during Device Restart
If a severe system error occurs during a manual restart of the device, the device automatically switches to the
fallback mode.
Fallback Mode in Normal Operation
In case of an unexpected restart of the device during normal operation, the fallback mode starts only if a severe
system error occurs during the restart. Otherwise, the device switches to normal operation immediately.
Manual Start of the Fallback Mode
If necessary, you can start the fallback mode manually using the softkey F4.
13.3.2.2 Start and Maintenance of the Fallback Mode
Start of the Fallback Mode
The Fallback Mode is started automatically in case of severe system errors during the device start. In this case,
the user interface fallback mode with the Information and Maintenance tabs appears in the open browser
once you have entered the IP address. The Information tab is opened.
To start the fallback mode manually, proceed as follows:
✧ Switch off the SICAM Q100 power supply.
✧ Press the softkey F4 on the SICAM Q100 and switch on the power supply while keeping the softkey F4
pressed.
✧ Keep the softkey F4 pressed (approx. 10 s) until the display shows FALLBACK.
✧ Release the softkey F4.

SICAM Q100 starts the fallback mode.
✧ Refresh the user interface in the browser.

The user interface Fallback mode with the Information and Maintenance tabs opens in the open
browser.
The Information tab is opened with the information on different device properties and available or not

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

available modules.
Figure 13-3 Fallback Mode, Information Tab (Detail)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Maintenance
In the Maintenance tab, you have the possibility to start the application or set the device in the default factory
settings state. It is possible to set the device in the default factory settings state without a user account.
Figure 13-4 Fallback Mode, Maintenance Tab
Firmware Upload and Delete All User Accounts
If you select a valid firmware package and click Upload, all user accounts are deleted.
The progress is shown in the Status information.
NOTE
The whole operation takes more than 3 min, and must not be interrupted, for example by a power loss;
otherwise, the device cannot recover and must be sent back to the factory.
NOTE
If you forgot the user credentials, it is the only way to set the device in the factory state to create a new role of
Administrator or User Account Manager.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

To access to other functions, log on with the right user name and password. If you have no user account, you
can create the initial user account in the Fallback mode.
Figure 13-5 Fallback Mode, Create the Initial User Account
After you log on successfully, the Maintenance tab will be added with the following sections depending on the
user roles:
• Firmware upload
• Run calibration
• Save information
• Parameter reset
• Error log

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Figure 13-6 Fallback Mode, Firmware
Firmware upload
This session is available for the user with a role of installer or administrator. You can find more information on
uploading the firmware in chapter 9.5.1.
Save information
In this section, you can click Save device information to save the device-specific information to a local file. It
is available for the user with a role of viewer, operator, installer, engineer, backup operator, or administrator.
Parameter reset
In this section, you can restart the device with the default parameter set. It is available for the user with a role
of engineer, installer, or administrator.
Error log
In this section, you can delete the error messages in the error-log file. It is available for the user with a role of
operator or administrator.
NOTE
The section Run calibration is a service function. This function is exclusively used at the factory.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14 Technical Data
14.1 General Device Data 380
14.2 Test Data 387
14.3 Dimensions 390

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.1 General Device Data
14.1.1 Power Supply
Direct Voltage
Rated input voltages 24 V to 250 V

Admissible input voltage tolerance ±20 %
Permitted ripple of the input voltage 15 %
Maximum inrush current

At  110 V < 15 A
At 220 V to 300 V  22 A; after 250 µs: < 5 A
Maximum power consumption 6W
Alternating Voltage
Rated input voltages 110 V to 230 V

System frequency at AC 50 Hz/60 Hz
Admissible input voltage tolerance ±20 %
Permitted harmonics 2 kHz
Maximum inrush current

At  115 V < 15 A
At 230 V  22 A; after 250 µs: < 5 A
Maximum power consumption 16 VA

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.1.2 Inputs and Outputs
Inputs for Alternating Voltage Measurements, Connector Block F - Cat III
Rated input alternating voltage range

Phase-N/PE AC 57.73 V to 400 V (autorange)
 IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 230 V: 200 %
overvoltage
UL conditions:
Phase-phase AC 100 V to 690 V (autorange)
 IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 400 V: 200 %
overvoltage
UL conditions:
Maximum input alternating voltage

Phase-N/PE 460 V (347 V for UL)
Phase-phase 796 V (600 V for UL)
Input impedances
a, b, c to N 3.0 M
a-b, b-c, c-a 3.0 M
Further information about the voltage measuring inputs

Power consumption per input for Vmax 460 V 70 mW
Permissible power frequency 42.5 Hz to 69.0 Hz
Measuring error under environmental influences: acc. to IEC 61000-4-30 Ed. 3 Class A (0.1 %)
see technical data
Sampling rate 10.24 kHz

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
Inputs for Alternating Current Measurements, Connector Block E - Cat III
Input alternating currents

Rated input current range AC 1 A to 5 A (autorange)
Max. input current AC 10 A
Power consumption per input

at 5 A 100 mVA
Further information about the current measuring inputs

Max. rated input voltage 150 V
Measuring error under environmental influences: acc. to IEC 61000-4-30 Ed. 3 Class A (0.1 %)
see technical data
Thermal stability 10 A continuous
100 A for max. 1 s
Sampling rate 10.24 kHz
Binary Inputs, Connector Block U - Cat III
Maximum input voltage DC 300 V

Static input current 1.34 mA ± 20 %
UIL min (at threshold voltage 19 V) DC 14 V
UIL max (at threshold voltage 19 V) DC 19 V
Propagation delay low to high 2.8 ms ± 0.3 ms
Binary Outputs, Connector Block G - Cat III
Maximum contact voltage

Alternating voltage 230 V
Direct voltage 250 V
Maximum currents
Maximum continuous contact current 100 mA
Maximum pulse current for 0.1 s 300 mA
Further information about the binary outputs

Internal impedance 50
Admissible switching frequency 10 Hz

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.1.3 Communication Interfaces
Ethernet (Connector Z)
Ethernet, electrical Connection Device top side

RJ45 connector socket
10/100Base-T acc. to IEEE802.3
LED yellow: 100 Mbit/s (off/on)
LED green:
 flashing: active
 on: not active
 off: no connection
Protocols Modbus TCP
IEC 61850 Server
Voltage strength DC 700 V, AC 1500 V
Transmission rate 100 Mbit/s
Cable for 10/100 Base-T 100 to 150  STP, CAT5
Maximum cable length 100 m, if well installed
10/100 Base-T
Serial Interface (Connector J)
RS485 Connection Terminal side, 9-pin D-sub socket
Protocol Modbus RTU Master and gateway function

Baud rate (adjustable) Min. 1200 bit/s
Max. 115 200 bit/s
Maximum distance of Max. 1 km

transmission (depending on transmission rate)
Transmission level Low: -5 V to -1.5 V
High: +1.5 V to +5 V
Reception level Low:  -0.2 V
High:  +0.2 V
Bus termination Not integrated, bus termination using plugs with

integrated bus terminating resistors (see figure
14-1 )

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
Recommended Termination of the RS485 Interface (Connector J)
The RS485 bus requires at least the bus termination shown in the figure below, with pull-up/pull-down resistors:
DC +5 V 390  220  390 
Bus termination
A B GND
Figure 14-1 Termination of the RS485 Interface
The bus termination must be respectively carried out at the first and last RS485 device interface of the bus. No
terminating resistor may be used at all other devices in this line.
Siemens recommends the use of a bus termination plug with integrated (activatable) resistors in accordance
with figure 14-1, for example plugs with 35°-cable outlet type 6ES7972-0BA42-0XA0. Use a 2-wired, twisted
and shielded cable (see 2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories 22). In case of outdoor assembly Siemens
recommends a rodent protection. You can find current installation material at SIEMENS IS in the "Catalog for
Industrial Communication", chapter "PROFIBUS", see also:
https://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/automation/en/industrial-communications/Pages/Default.aspx.
The 9-pin D-sub socket of the RS485 interface is connected as follows:
Pin No. Assignment Pin No. Assignment
1 Shield 6 DC +5 V
Supply voltage for terminating resistors
(max. 100 mA)
2 Not assigned 7 RTS

Direction control
(if required for an external conversion)
3 A 8 B
RS485 connection pin A RS485 connection pin B
4 Not assigned 9 Not assigned
5 GND
(towards DC +5 V)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.1.4 Environmental Conditions and Climatic Stress Tests
Environmental Conditions
Temperature data Operating temperature -25 °C to +55 °C

-13 °F to +131 °F
Devices with display: the legibility of the display is
impaired at temperatures < 0 °C (+32 °F).
Temperature during transport -40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °F to +158 °F
Temperature during storage -40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °F to +158 °F
Maximum temperature gradient 20 K/h
Air humidity data Mean relative humidity per year  75 %

Maximum relative humidity 95 % 30 days a year
Condensation during operation Not permitted
Condensation during transport and storage Permitted
Altitude and operation Max. altitude above sea level 2000 m

site Operation site Only indoors
Climatic Stress Tests
Standards: IEC 60068

Dry cold:
IEC 60068-2-1 test Ad
Dry heat during operation, storage, and transport:
IEC 60068-2-2 test Bd
Damp heat:
IEC 60068-2-78 test Ca
Change of temperature:
IEC 60068-2-14 test Na and Nb

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.1.5 General Data
Battery Type PANASONIC CR2032 or

VARTA 6032 101 501
Voltage 3V
Capacity 230 mAh
Typical life For operation with permanently applied
supply voltage:
10 years
For operation with sporadically interrupted
supply voltage:
a total of 2 months over a 10-year period
Internal memory capacity 2 GB
Degree of protection
Housing (without front panel IP20
and terminals)
Panel flush mounting (front) IP40
Terminals IP20

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.2 Test Data
14.2 Test Data
Reference Conditions according to IEC 62586-1 for Determining the Test Data
Ambient temperature 23 °C ± 2 °C
Relative humidity 40 % to 60 % RH
Supply voltage VPS ± 1 %
Phases (3-wire network) 3
External continuous magnetic fields DC field:  40 A/m
AC field:  3 A/m
DC components V/I none
Signal waveform sinus
Frequency 50 Hz ± 0.5 Hz
60 Hz ± 0.5 Hz
Voltage magnitude Udin ± 1 %
Flicker Pst < 0.1 %
Unbalance (all channels) 100 % ± 0.5 % of Udin
Harmonic 0 % to 3 % of Udin
Interharmonic 0 % to 0.5 % of Udin
14.2.1 Electrical Tests
Standards
Standards: IEC EN 61000-6-2

IEC EN 61000-6-4
IEC EN 61010-1
IEC EN 61010-2-030
Insulation Test according to IEC EN 61010-1 and IEC EN 61010-2-030
Inputs/Outputs Insulation Rated ISO Test Voltage Category

Voltage
Current measurement inputs Reinforced 150 V AC 2.3 kV Cat. III
Voltage measurement inputs Reinforced 600 V Surge voltage Cat. III

9.76 kV
300 V Cat. IV
Supply voltage Reinforced 300 V DC 3.125 kV Cat. III
Binary outputs Reinforced 300 V AC 3.536 kV Cat. III
Binary inputs Reinforced 300 V AC 3.536 kV Cat. III
Ethernet interface SELV < 24 V AC 1500 V -
RS485 interface SELV < 24 V DC 700 V -

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.2 Test Data
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests)
Standards: IEC EN 61000-6-2

For more standards see also individual
functions
Electrostatic discharge, Class III, 6 kV contact discharge; 8 kV air discharge,
IEC 61000-4-2 both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 
with connected Ethernet cable
High frequency electromagnetic field, amplitude-modulated, 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 3 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Class III
IEC 61000-4-3
Fast transient bursts, Class III 2 kV; 5 ns/50 ns; 5 kHz;
IEC 61000-4-4 Burst length = 15 ms;
Repetition rate 300 ms;
Both polarities;
Ri = 50 ;
Test duration 1 min
High energy surge voltages (SURGE), Installation Class III Impulse: 1.2 µs/50 µs
IEC 61000-4-5
Auxiliary voltage Common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 µF
Diff. mode:1 kV; 2 ; 18 µF
Measuring inputs, binary inputs, and Common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 µF
relay outputs Diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0,5 µF
Line-conducted high frequencies, amplitude-modulated, Class 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
III
IEC 61000-4-6
Power system frequency magnetic field 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s
IEC 61000-4-8, Class IV;
1 MHz test, Class III, IEC 61000-4-18 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz;  = 15 µs;
400 Surges per s;
Test duration 1 min; Ri = 200 
EMC Test for Noise Emission (Type Test)
Standard: IEC EN 61000-6-4

Disturbance voltage to lines, only auxiliary voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz Limit Class A
IEC-CISPR 22
Disturbance-field strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit Class A
IEC-CISPR 22

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.2 Test Data
14.2.2 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress during Stationary Operation

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-6 test Fc 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz:
1 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 or-
thogonal axes.
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-27 test Ea 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks in both
directions of the 3 axes
Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60068-3-3 test Fc 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 2 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-6 test Fc 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude;
8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-27 test Ea 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Continuous Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-29 test Eb 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Free fall 0.5 m
IEC 60068-2-32 test Ed
14.2.3 Safety Standards
Standards: EN 61010
IEC EN 61010-1, IEC EN 61010-2-30

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.3 Dimensions
14.3 Dimensions
Mass approx. 0.55 kg

Dimension (W x H x D) 96 mm x 96 mm x 103 mm
3.78 inch x 3.78 inch x 4.06 inch
8.30 (0.33)
98.68 (3.89)
92.15 (3.63)
88.10 (3.47)
96 .00 (3.78)
103.21 (4.06)
Dimensions in mm (inch)
15.11 (0.59)
101.56 (4 .00)
96.00 (3.78)
Figure 14-2 Dimensional Drawing of SICAM Q100

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.3 Dimensions
92,0 +0,8 mm (3.62 +0.03 inch)
92,0 +0,8 mm (3.62 +0.03 inch)

Figure 14-3 Cut-out in Switch Panel

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
14 Technical Data
14.3 Dimensions

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
15 Operational Indications
Indication Description Notes
Device OK The device startup was successful. Indication on: Device ready
Battery Failure Battery voltage < 2.7 V or no Indication on: Battery failure
battery inserted
Time Synchronization Error during the time synchroniza- Indication off: At least one time message was received
Error tion from the NTP server or fieldbus during the set timer ("Error indication after"). The time
stamp is set when the first valid time information or time
synchronization is received.
Indication on: No time message was received during the

set timer ("Error indication after").
The time stamp is set after the "Error indication after"
timer has expired and no synchronization message was
received.
Parameter range: see chapter 9.3.7.1
Error sources with RTC:

- no valid time after device startup
Error sources with NTP or fieldbus:
- „Error indication after" timer expires and no synchro-
nization message was received
Error during internal time synchro- Indication on: RTC time invalid
nization Indication off: After setting the clock via HTML (see
chapter 9.3.7.1)
During battery failure at device startup
Default IP Address The IP-Addr. push button has been Indication on: IP-Addr. push button was pressed
pressed for more than 3 s.
The device restarts and applies the default IP address.
Primary NTP Server Faulty or no response from the Indication on: Error
Error primary NTP server Indication off: Valid time messages have been received
for a period of 10 min
Only for time synchronization via Ethernet NTP (see

chapter 9.3.7.1)
Secondary NTP Faulty or no response from the sec- Indication on: Error
Server Error ondary NTP server Indication off: Valid time messages have been received
for a period of 10 min
Only for time synchronization via Ethernet NTP (see

chapter 9.3.7.1)
Daylight Saving Time Switching between daylight saving Indication on: Daylight saving time
time/standard time Indication off: Standard time

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Ethernet Link Error Ethernet connection error Indication on: Error

Indication off: Ethernet link recognized
Modbus TCP OK At least one Modbus TCP link has Indication on: At least one Modbus message was re-
received Modbus messages. ceived during the set monitoring time. The time stamp is
(Modbus TCP Server) set when the first valid message is received.
Indication off: No Modbus message was received during

the set monitoring time.
See chapter 9.3.7.2
Modbus RTU Master All configured Modbus slave Indication on: If all configured Modbus slave devices
OK devices respond to request tele- respond successfully to request telegrams.
grams.
Indication off: If at least one Modbus slave device does
not respond to a request telegram or if at least one
Modbus slave device responds with a Modbus exception
code (see System Manual Q100; chapter 2.2.2).
See chapter 9.3.7.3
IEC 61850 Communi- Communication via protocol Indication on: At least one message was received during
cation OK IEC 61850 is correct. the set monitoring time. The time stamp is set when the
first valid message is received.
Indication off: No message was received during the set

monitoring time.
See chapter 9.3.7.2
MQTT Communica- The communication to an MQTT Indication ON: The communication to an MQTT broker
tion OK broker is successfully established. is successfully established.
Indication OFF: The communication to an MQTT broker
is not established.
Settings Load Starting to change the parameters Indication on: Start of changes
of the passive set of parameters. Indication off: Changes complete
Settings Check The passive set of parameters is to Indication on: Check started
be activated; the internal parame- Indication off: Check complete
ter check is running.
Settings Activate The passive set of parameters is Indication on: Activation started
enabled and the device works with Indication off: Activation complete
these parameters.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Limit Violation x Indication that a parameterized lim- Indication on: The limit of the monitored measured value
iting value has been violated has been violated or no measured value is parameter-
ized as input of the limiting value.
Indication off: The limit of the monitored measured value
is not violated.
Message invalid: The monitored measured value is
invalid
(e.g. frequency at V < 15 % of Vrated).
x = 1 to 16
Indication 1 from Status of the indications that can be Indication on: ON

Remote set to control the LEDs and the Indication off: OFF
binary outputs via the communica- Message invalid: Not yet updated via the communication
Indication 2 from tion. or again invalid via the communication
Remote
Indication x from Status of any indications which can Indication on: ON

Remote be set for control via communica- Indication off: OFF
tion. Message invalid: Not yet updated via the communication
or again invalid via the communication
x = 3 to 14
Binary Input 1 Indication of the logic state of the Indication invalid: in startup not updated
binary input (ON/OFF) Binary input high: ON (OFF if inverted)
Binary Input 2 Binary input low: OFF (ON if inverted)
If the binary input has not been set to a function (load
profile, tariff TOU), a change is logged as an operational
indication; otherwise not, according to factory setting
(can be set).
Rotating Field Clock- Indication of rotation voltage Indication ON: Phase sequence Va-Vb-Vc, rotation
wise clockwise
Indication OFF: Phase sequence Va-Vc-Vb, (2 phases

interchanged); rotation anti-clockwise
Indication invalid: Direction of rotation cannot be calcu-

lated (e.g. no voltage applied)
Group indication x Up to 4 single-point indications can A total of 4 group indications (x = 1 to 4) can be param-
be linked logically and combined to eterized.
a group indication.
Voltage Event Availa- Indication of a supply voltage event Overvoltage, undervoltage, frequency interruption
ble
Frequency Event Indication of a frequency event Overfrequency or underfrequency

Available
Volt. Unbalance Indication of a voltage unbalance Voltage unbalance

Event Available event
SD Card Error Indication of an SD card error SD card defective or read/write error 1)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Load Profile Period Indication that a period has been Only Indication on is logged.
Closed closed.
Load Profile Synchr. Indication that synchronization Only Indication on is logged.

Period signal was received.
Load Profile Tariff x Indication that the tariff x has been Only Indication on is logged.x = 1 to 8
set.
Load Profile Reset Indication that the load-profile Load-profile buffer was deleted by user's action or
Buffer buffer was deleted. parameter change.
Only Indication on is logged.
1) The SD card has no contact or is defective; you must not replace the card yourself. The device also works
without active SD card. However, data storage when operating the recorders is not possible. In this case,
the recorder data can be forwarded and processed only via communication.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16 Operating Parameters
16.1 Process Connections 398
16.2 Automation Functions 404
16.3 HMI 407
16.4 Energy Management 410
16.5 Recording and Reporting 412
16.6 Administrative 419
NOTE for user on the online help
This chapter is integrated as an online help in the user interface.
The description of parameterization of the operating parameters can be found in the manual SICAM Q100, or-
der number E50417-H1040-C522-A7.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.1 Process Connections

The following process connections are available:
• AC Measurement
• Binary inputs
• Binary Outputs
• LEDs
16.1.1 AC Measurement

Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz (± 7.5 Hz)
60 Hz (± 9 Hz)
Network type Four-wire, three-phase, Single-phase network
unbalanced Three-wire, three-phase, balanced
Three-wire, three-phase, unbalanced (2 * I)
Three-wire, three-phase, unbalanced (3 * I)
Four-wire, three-phase, balanced
Four-wire, three-phase, unbalanced
Power quality values for 1) Phase to neutral Phase to neutral
Phase to phase
Nominal/Declared supply AC 230.00 V AC 57.73 V to 400 V (autorange)
voltage  IEC 61000-4-30 Class A: to AC 230 V:
200 % overvoltage
 > AC 230 V to 400 V: 200 % to 15 %
overvoltage
UL conditions:
 > AC 170 V to 300 V: 200 % to 15 %
overvoltage
Voltage transformer no yes
no
Primary rated voltage AC 10 000 V AC 100.0 V to AC 1 000 000.0 V
Secondary rated voltage AC 100 V AC 1.0 V to AC 460.0 V
Current transformer no yes
no
Primary rated current AC 1 000.0 A AC 1.0 A to AC 100 000.0 A
Secondary rated current AC 1.0 A AC 1.0 A to 10.0 A
Transformer ratio In2) no no
yes
Primary rated current In AC 1 000.00 A AC 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A
Zero point suppression 0.3 % (from Vnom, 0.0 % to 10.0 %
Irated)
Voltage harmonic unit % %
V
Measurement aggregation -none- -none-
150/180-cycle interval
1)
Power quality values for is available only if the following Network type is selected: Four-wire, three-
phase, unbalanced.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
2)
Transformer ratio In is available only if the following Network type is selected: Four-wire, three-phase,
unbalanced.
16.1.2 Binary Inputs U1/U2 and U3/U2
Threshold voltage
Threshold voltage 19 V 19 V
(one setting for both binary inputs) 88 V
176 V
Binary inputs
Terminals U1/2

Load profile source
Tariff source

has been set)
yes

has been set)

Terminals U3/2

Load profile source
Tariff source

has been set)
yes

has been set)


E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
1)
See following note:
NOTE
The parameter cannot be changed in this field. In the Configuration tab, Energy management menu, select
Load profile source or Tariff source. If you did not select a source, Status information is automatically se-
lected.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.1.3 Binary Outputs
Source type Indication Indication

Energy counter
Source Type Indication
Indication -none- -none-

(only if source type = indication) Device OK
Battery Failure
NOTES Settings Load
Only the indications for the parame- Settings Check
terization of the binary outputs are Settings Activate
Modbus TCP OK
displayed which can be used
Ethernet Link Error
according to the current device set-
Time Synchronization Error
tings. Primary NTP Server Error
Indications which are read by
Secondary NTP Server Error
Modbus slave devices are available
Daylight Saving Time
in the list box if they were parame-
Ethernet Link 2 Error
terized in Modbus Master Mapping.
Default IP Address
Limit Violation x (x = 1 to 16) *)
Rotation Voltage Clockwise
Group Indication x (x = 1 to 4) *)
IEC 61850 Communication OK
SD Card Error
Voltage Event Available
Frequency Event Available
Voltage-Unbalance Event Available
Indication x from Remote (x = 3 to 14)
SICAM Subdevice 1 OK
Binary Input x-N SICAM IO 1 (x = 1 to 3) *)
Binary Input x-P SICAM IO 1 (x = 1 to 3) *)
Load profile period closed
Load profile synchr. period
Load profile tariff x (x = 1 to 8)
Binary input 1 *)
Binary input 2 *)
Modbus RTU Master OK
New MSV record made
Indication x Slv y (x = 1 to 6; y = 1 to 8) *)
MQTT communication OK
*)
Designation can be changed during
the parameterization.
yes

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Operating mode Persistent Persistent

Persistent with fail safe
Pulse
Pulse with retrigger
Output time for pulse operating 20 (* 10 ms) 50 ms to 3 600 000 ms

mode (setting only possible if oper-
ating modes Pulse and Pulse with
retrigger)
Source Type Energy Counter
Energy counter -none- -none-

WPa_exp
WPb_exp
WPc_exp
WP_exp
WPa_imp
WPb_imp
WPc_imp
WP_imp
WQa_ind
WQb_ind
WQc_ind
WQ_ind
WQa_cap
WQb_cap
WQc_cap
WQ_cap
WSa
WSb
WSc
WS
WP_exp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WP_imp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_ind_imp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_cap_imp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_ind_exp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_cap_exp_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_ind_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WQ_cap_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
WS_tariff_x (x = 1 to 8)
Energy increase per pulse 1.0 Wh 0.1 Wh/VAh/varh to

1 000 000 Wh/VAh/varh
Output time pulse operating mode 20 * 10 ms = 200 ms 50 ms to 3 600 000 ms

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.1.4 LEDs
LED Default Setting Setting Options
RUN Device ready Not settable
ERROR -none- -none-

Battery Failure
Ethernet Link Error
Primary NTP Server Error
Secondary NTP Server Error
SD Card Error
H1 -none- -none-
Device OK
H2 Battery Failure
Settings Load
NOTES Settings Check
Only the indications for the Settings Activate
parameterization of the binary Modbus TCP OK
Ethernet Link Error
outputs are displayed which can
be used according to the current
device settings. Secondary NTP Server Error
Modbus slave devices are avail-
able in the list box if they were pa-
Default IP Address
rameterized in Modbus Master
Mapping.
SD Card Error
Binary input 1 *)
Binary input 2 *)
New MSV record made
*) Designation can be changed during

the parameterization.
Indication inverted no no
yes

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.2 Automation Functions

The following automation functions are available:
• Limit violation 1-8
• Limit violation 9-16
• Group indication 1-4
16.2.1 Limit Violation 1-8 and 9-16
Measurement -none- -none-

Va, Vb, Vc
Vab, Vbc, Vca
Ia, Ib, Ic
VN, Vavg
IN, Iavg
Pa, Pb, Pc, P
Qa, Qb, Qc, Q
Sa, Sb, Sc, S
cos  (a), cos  (b), cos  (c), cos 
PFa, PFb, PFc, PF
UIa, UIb, UIc, UI
f
Neg.seq.comp.V
Neg.seq.comp.I
THDS Va, THDS Vb, THDS Vc
THDS Vab, THDS Vbc, THDS Vca
THDS Ia, THDS Ib, THDS Ic
ab V, bc V, ca V
ab I, bc I, ca I
Q1a, Q1b, Q1c; Q1
Pinst (a-n), Pinst (b-n),Pinst (c-n)
Pst (a-n), Pst (b-n),Pst (c-n)
Plt (a-n), Plt (b-n),Plt (c-n)
Pinst (a-b), Pinst (b-c), Pinst (c-a)
Pst (a-b), Pst (b-c), Pst (c-a)
Plt (a-b), Plt (b-c), Plt (c-a)
Zero seq.comp.V
Zero seq.comp.I
MV x from Bus device y *)
(x = 1 to 15 and y = 1 to 8)
(Setting ranges pending from network type)
*) Designation can be changed during the

parameterization.
Limit 0.00 -1 000 000 000 to 1 000 000 000 (unit)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Limit type Lower Lower

Upper
Hysteresis (%) 1.0 0.0 to 10.0
Violation indication Limit Violation x Any

1)
31 bytes of UTF-8

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.2.2 Group Indications 1-4
Source -none- -none-

Device OK
NOTES Battery Failure
Only the indications for the Settings Load
parameterization of the Settings Check
Settings Activate
binary outputs are displayed
Modbus TCP OK
which can be used accord-
Ethernet Link Error
ing to the current device set- Time Synchronization Error
tings. Primary NTP Server Error
Indications which are read Secondary NTP Server Error
by Modbus slave devices Daylight Saving Time
are available in the list box if Ethernet Link 2 Error
they were parameterized in Default IP Address
Modbus Master Mapping. Limit Violation x (x = 1 to 16) *)
SD Card Error
Binary input 1 *)
Binary input 2 *)
New MSV record made

parameterization.
yes
Logic operation NONE NONE

OR
AND
Group indication name Group Indication x Any

1)
31 bytes of UTF-8

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.3 HMI
16.3 HMI
16.3.1 Display Settings
Contrast 8 0 to 10
Inverse display no no
yes
Phase label (L1,L2,L3) (L1,L2,L3)

(a,b,c)
16.3.2 User-Defined Screen
Screen type -none- -none-

Screen name USER_SCREEN_x Max. 18 characters

(x = 1 to 4) Only English and German letters, num-
bers, and special characters are permitted.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.3 HMI
2 measured values, numerical -none- -none-

Display 1, numerical Va, Vb, Vc
Display 2, numerical Vab, Vbc, Vca
Ia, Ib, Ic
4 measured values, numerical -none- VN, Vavg
Display 1, numerical IN, Iavg
Display 2, numerical Pa, Pb, Pc, P
Display 3, numerical Qa, Qb, Qc, Q
Display 4, numerical Sa, Sb, Sc, S
cos  (a), cos  (b), cos  (c), cos 
2 measured values, graphical -none- PFa, PFb, PFc, PF
and numerical UIa, UIb, UIc, UI
Display 1, graph./num. f
Display 2, graph./num. Neg.seq.comp.V
Neg.seq.comp.I
THDS Va, THDS Vb, THDS Vc
3 measured values, graphical -none-
THDS Vab, THDS Vbc, THDS Vca
and numerical
THDS Ia, THDS Ib, THDS Ic
ab V, bc V, ca V
ab I, bc I, ca I
Q1a, Q1b, Q1c, Q1
Pinst (a-n), Pinst (b-n), Pinst (c-n)
Pst (a-n), Pst (b-n), Pst (c-n)
Plt (a-n), Plt (b-n), Plt (c-n)
Pinst (a-b), Pinst (b-c), Pinst (c-a)
Pst (a-b), Pst (b-c), Pst (c-a)
Plt (a-b), Plt (b-c), Plt (c-a)
Zero seq.comp.V
Zero seq.comp.I
WPa_exp
WPb_exp
WPc_exp
WP_exp
WPa_imp
WPb_imp
WPc_imp
WP_imp
WQa_ind
WQb_ind
WQc_ind
WQ_ind
WQa_cap
WQb_cap
WQc_cap
WQ_cap
WSa
WSb
WSc
WS
MV x from Bus device y *)
(x = 1 to 15 and y = 1 to 8)
(Setting ranges pending from network

type)

parameterization.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.3 HMI
Display x, graph./num.
(x = 1 to 3) The minimum and maximum value is
Min value 0.0 defined by the selected parameters.
Max value 10.0
(unit according to
measured value)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.4 Energy Management
16.4.1 Load Profile
Subperiode time 15 minutes 1 min to 6 min in 1-min steps, 10 min, 12 min,

Number of subperiods 1 1 to 5
Synchronization source Internal clock None

Protocol
Binary input 1
Binary input 2
Internal clock
Kind of used reactive Q1 Q1

power Qn
Qtot
16.4.2 Tariffs (TOU)
Synchronization source Protocol Protocol 1)

Binary input 1 2)
Binary input 2 2)
Calendar
The following parameters are available only when Synchronization source is set to Calendar.
Season 1 Start 01-01 01-01 to 12-31
Season 1 End 06-30 01-01 to 12-31
Season 2 Start 07-01 Not settable

The rest days of the full year
Season 2 End 12-31
Weekend Setting Thursday and Friday Sunday to Saturday, max. 2 days





E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff No 3) Yes

Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff No Yes

Season x (x = 1 or 2) Tariff Every Day Every Day

y (y = 1 to 8) Workday/ Workday
Weekend Selection Weekend
Coverage Check Pass
Fail (with gap)
Fail (with overlap)
1)In this case, the protocol Modbus TCP can control tariff 1 to tariff 8. Refer to the System Manual SICAM
Q100, chapter 2.2.7.18 Register 0154: Tariffs (read and write), order number E50417-C1040-C522.
2) This synchronization source can only control tariff 1 or tariff 2.
3) The default settings of Tariff 1 Period 1 Active for 2 seasons are checked.
16.4.3 Energy Upper Limit
Energy Upper Limit Energy Counter Energy Counter

Energy Value
16.4.4 Energy Freeze and Record
Interval 10 minutes 10 minutes

15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.5 Recording and Reporting
16.5.1 Event Recorders
Voltage event
Swell threshold 110 % 105 % to 140 % in 5-% steps
Dip threshold 90 % 75 % to 95 % in 5-% steps
Interruption threshold 5% 1 %, 2 %, 3 %, 5 %, 8 % 10 %
Event hysteresis 2% 1 % to 6 % in 1-% steps
Event detection mode ph-N ph-N

ph-ph
RVC event
RVC threshold 6% 1 % to 6 % in 1-% steps
RVC hysteresis 1) 3% 0.5 % to 3 % in 0.5 steps
RVC event detection mode 2) ph-N ph-N

ph-ph
Frequency event
Underfrequency threshold 1% 0.1 % to 1.0 % in 0.1-% steps and

1.0 % to 5.0 % in 1.0-%-steps
Overfrequency threshold 1% 0.1 % to 1.0 % in 0.1-% steps and

1.0 % to 5.0 % in 1.0-%-steps
Voltage-unbalance event
Voltage-unbalance threshold 5% 1 % to 5 % in 1-% steps
1)
According to IEC61000-4-30 Ed.3, RVC hysteresis is recommended to be half of the threshold.
2)
RVC event detection mode will always synchronize with the setting Event detection mode.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.5.2 Trigger Management

Voltage trigger limits
yes
Numerical
Lower threshold 90.00 % 0.00 % to 99.99 % of the nominal/declared
of the nominal/declared supply voltage
supply voltage
0.0 V to 1 000 000.0 V
Upper threshold 110.00 % 100.0 % to 10 000.0 % of the nominal/de-
of the nominal/declared clared supply voltage
supply voltage
0.0 V to 1 000 000.0 V
Hysteresis 2.00 % 0.0 % to 50.0 % of the nominal/declared
supply voltage
Detection mode 1) ph-N ph-N
ph-ph
Current trigger limits
yes
Numerical
Lower threshold 90.00 % 0.00 % to 99.99 % of of nominal current In
0.0 A to 1 000 000.0 A
Upper threshold 110.00 % 100.0 % to 10 000.0 % of of nominal
of nominal current In current In
0.0 A to 1 000 000 A

Hysteresis 2.00 % 0.0 % to 50.0 % of of nominal current In
Configuration binary trigger
yes
Trigger source Binary Input 1 Indication 1 from Remote
Binary Input 1
Binary Input 2
Trigger value OFF ON
OFF
Waveform capture setting
Total recording duration 2.0 s 0.2 s to 3.0 s in 0.2-s steps
Record ph-ph voltage no no
yes
1) The detection mode will always synchronize with the setting of Record ph-ph voltage.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.5.3 Recorder Parameters
Measurement recorder
PQ data Parameter
Average intervals - Frequency 10 s fixed
Short-term flicker 10 min fixed
Long-term flicker 2h fixed
Average interval - Voltage / 10 min 30 s, 1 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,

Unbalance / Harmonics 1 h, 2 h
Record additional data (I, P, Q, no no

S etc.) yes
Recorder of average - Min no no

yes
Recorder of average - Max no no

yes
Harmonics parity Odd Even

Odd
All
File generation every: 24 h At average interval File generation

every:
(corresponds to the setting of
the Average interval parame- 30 s 1 h (fix)
ter) 1 min 2 h (fix)
The created PQDIF files can be 10 min, 15 min, 2h

downloaded via the user inter- 30 min, 1 h or
2h 4h
face or with the IEC 61850 pro-
tocol. 6h
12 h
24 h
Recorded file type PQDIF PQDIF

CSV
All
Flicker lamp model 230 V 230 V

120 V
Energy value Parameter
Energy value recorder 10 minutes Not configurable

The same as the value of Interval set in
Configure -> Energy management ->
Energy freeze and reset.
Trend recorder

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Numerical
Tolerance number Percentage: 3 % of primary 1 % to 5 % in 1-% steps

nominal voltage,
Numerical: 0.50 V 0.2 V to 500.0 V
Maximum recording interval 10 min 10 min, 30 min,

1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h
16.5.4 Mains Signaling Voltage
Mains signaling voltage measurement
no
MSV active no
yes
1 frequency
No. of MSV frequencies 1 frequency
2 frequencies
Mains signaling voltage capture setting
Detection threshold 1 % of Udin From 1 % to 15 % of Udin
Total recording duration 75 s 15 s to 120 s in 15-s steps

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.5.5 Memory Management
Memory splitting
Event recorder 1.0 % 1 % to 19 %
Measurement recorder 35.0 % 33 % to 51 %

(the recording time depends on
the aggregation interval)
Trend recorder 47.0 % Min. 31 %

(residual storage capacity)
Fault recorder 3.0 % 3 % to 21 %

(Numbers of records depends on
the fault-record time)
Mains signaling voltage recorder 14% 14 % to 20 %

(Numbers of records depends on
the record time of the mains sig-
naling voltage)
16.5.6 Report Configuration
General Information
Company: - Any text displayed in the print-

Department: out of the power quality report
Supervisor:
Inspector:
Location:
Comment:
Power Quality Report
Evaluation mode according to: EN 50160 LV&MV EN 50160 LV&MV

EN 50160 HV
User defined
Flagging acc. to no no
IEC 61000-4-30 yes
Power frequency: Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
99.5 % of measurement should be in -1.0 % to 1.0 % deviation of the
power frequency.
power frequency.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Power supply voltage magnitude Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Voltage unbalance: 1) Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Subgroup Total Harmonic Distortion (THDS): Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Supply voltage interruptions: Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
1. Short interruption until 1 second duration
2. Short interruption until 3 minute duration
3. Long interruption longer than 3 minute duration
Harmonic voltages: Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Even harmonics
Odd harmonics: multiples of 3
Odd harmonics: not multiples of 3
Mains signaling voltages 2) Any setting for user-defined

evaluation mode
Supply voltage should be in -15.0 % to +15.0 % deviation of the nominal/
declared supply voltage
99.0 % of “YYY” Hz mains signaling voltage should be less than “xxx” %
1) According to EN 50160, up to 3 % unbalance can occur in 3-wire networks in areas with many 1-wire and
2-wire connections.
2)
The frequency “YYY” and limit “xxx” are based on the configured frequency.
16.5.7 Recording Control
Start record option Start next 10th minute Start next minute
Start next 10th minute
Start immediately
Start next hour
Start next day
Start time - Display of the start time in:

Depends on the configuration of Date/time
format.
Recording status - Not settable

Status display of recorder started or recorder
stopped

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.5.8 Transient Detection
Transient reference level 110 % 110 % to 240 % of Primary nominal voltage

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6 Administrative
The following administrative settings are available:
• Time synchronization
• Communication Ethernet
• OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
• Communication serial
• Modbus slave devices 1 to 8
• SICAM subdevices
• Device and language
• Account Management
• Syslog
16.6.1 Time Synchronization
Source time synchronization Internal Internal

Ethernet NTP
Fieldbus
Time zone offset +00:00 -12 to +13 (hours)

Daylight Saving Time switchover yes no

yes
DST offset +01:00 0 to + 2 (hours)

Start of DST March January to December

Last week First week
Second week
Third week
Fourth week
Last week
Sunday Sunday to Saturday
02:00 AM 0:00 to 23:00 (full hour)
End of DST October January to December

Last week First week
Second week
Third week
Fourth week
Last week
Sunday Sunday to Saturday
03:00 AM 0:00 to 23:00 (full hour)
Additional Parameters if the Source is Ethernet NTP (Modbus TCP and IEC 61850)
Primary NTP server IP Address 192.168.0.254 Any
Secondary NTP server IP Address 192.168.0.253 Any

No polling of the NTP server if 0.0.0.0
was entered

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Additional Parameters if Source is Fieldbus
16.6.2 Ethernet Communication
Communication Ethernet

0.0.0.0 = DHCP
Subnet mask 1) 255.255.255.0 Any
Default gateway 1) 192.168.0.1 Any
Ethernet switch on no no
yes
Enable SNMP no no
yes
OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) no no

yes
Bus protocol Modbus TCP -none-

Modbus TCP
IEC 61850
Both
Protocol Modbus TCP
Use a user-port number 2) no no

yes
User-port number 2) 10 000 10 000 to 65 535

(can only be set when Use a user-port
Access rights for user port Full Full

(can only be set when Use a user-port Read only
Access rights for port 502 Full Full

Read only
Keep Alive time 10 s 0 s = switch off

1 s to 65 535 s

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Communication supervision time 600 (* 100 ms) 0 s = none

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Modbus TCP/RTU Gateway

(Condition: The Modbus RTU Master protocol must have been selected under serial communication.)
Activated no no
yes
Response timeout 3) 10 (* 10 ms) (1 to 6000) * 10 ms

= 10 ms to 60 s
Protocol IEC 61850
IED Name SICAM_Q100_01 Max. 60 characters

Only a to z, A to Z, _, 0 to 9
are permitted.
The first character must be a
letter.
Voltage - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Current - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Power - Dead band 5% 1 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Power factor - Dead band 5% 2 % to 5 %, in 1-% steps
Frequency - Dead band 0.05 % 0.02 %

0.05 %
1)
After the parameter changes have been enabled, the device will reset.
2)
After enabling the parameter changes, any currently active Modbus TCP connections will be closed. The
Modbus TCP client must later reopen these connections.
3) These values are necessary if no Modbus slave device has been configured for the requested Unit ID. If a
Modbus slave device was configured, its values are used.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.3 OPC UA PubSub (MQTT)
Broker and network
Broker IP address or host name mqtt.eu1-b.mindsphere.io Any IP address or host name string
(maximum 128 characters)
Topic name 1) c/{ClientID}/o/opcua/ Any (maximum 128 characters)

{VersionMS}/u/
{Meas:d|File:d|Meta:m}
Connection mode 2) with TLS, with JSON Web Token with TLS
(JWT) with TLS, with JSON Web Token
(JWT)
MQTT user name empty Any (maximum 128 characters)
MQTT password empty Any (maximum 128 characters)
DNS server IP address 0.0.0.0 Any IP address
Data transmission
Voltage harmonics 3) yes yes

no
Harmonic currents 3) yes yes

no
Harmonics power 3) yes yes

no
Energy counters 3) yes yes

no
Energy counters transmit cycle 1 min 1 min to 1440 min
1)
Use the template value shown as default in the Topic name for the connection with MindSphere. The parts
in curly brackets are filled internally at startup.
2)
Set Connection mode to with TLS, with JSON Web Token (JWT) for the connection with MindSphere.
3)
Refer to the manual OPC UA PubSub (MQTT) Data Points to identify the individual data points.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.4 Communication Serial
Bus protocol Modbus RTU -none-

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU Master
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s 1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s

4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s
19 200 bit/s, 38 400 bit/s
57 600 bit/s, 115 200 bit/s
Parity Even None, 1 stop bit

Even
Odd
None, 2 stop bit

Read only

100 ms to 6 553 400 ms
Baud rate 19 200 bit/s 1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s

4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s
19 200 bit/s, 38 400 bit/s
57 600 bit/s, 115 200 bit/s
Parity Even None, 1 stop bit

Even
Odd
None, 2 stop bit

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
The Modbus specification requires that

the individual characters of a serial
Modbus RTU telegram have to be
transmitted successively with a maxi-
mum character gap of 1.5 character
times (or max. 750 µs for Baud rates
>19 200 bit/s). Longer silent intervals
between the characters are interpreted
as telegram end.
A longer gap between the characters
can be tolerated with this parameter.
Note that this also causes longer cycle
times then.
If at least one SICAM P50 device is

connected to the bus, at least the fol-
lowing values have to be set for Addi-
tional inter-character timeout:
1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s: 0
4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s: 2
19 200 bit/s: 3
38 400 bit/s: 4
57 600 bit/s, 115 200 bit/s: 6
Maximum 3x/4x register gap 10 Maximum number of not-mapped reg-

isters which are being requested
between mapped registers in one
request telegram.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.5 Modbus Slave Devices 1 – 8
16.6.5.1 Basic Settings
Name Modbus slave device 1 Max. 31 characters
Activated no no
yes (= Activation of the option field):

The buttons for parameterization of the
mapping data are also activated for the
slave device here.
Device address / Unit ID 1 1 to 247
(Modbus slave device address) Address corresponds to the Unit ID in

the Modbus TCP telegram with simulta-
neous use of the Modbus Gateway func-
tion.
Response timeout 10 (*10 ms) 1 to 6000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 60 s)
Retry limit 2 0 to 10
(0 = no request retries)
Number of request retries after expira-

tion of Response timeout before a com-
munication error for the Modbus slave is
identified.
Scan cycle for measured values 50 (*10 ms) 0 to 36 0000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 1 h)

Scan cycle for indications 0 (*10 ms) 0 to 36 0000 * 10 ms

(10 ms to 1 h)

Scan cycle on error 5s 1 to 3600 s

( 1 s to 1 h)
Retry cycle for sending request tele-

grams if the retry limits are exceeded or
in the case of error responses.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.5.2 Mapping – Measured Values 1 – 15
Name MV x Slv 1 Max. 31 characters

(x = 1 to 15)
Max. 10 characters if the name is also to
be displayed on the device display.
Unit Multiplier: - m (milli)

c (centi)
Note on frequency measured d (deci)
values: -
h (hecto)
If a frequency measured value k (kilo)
(unit: Hz) has been parameterized M (Mega)
without a multiplier (multiplier: -), an G (Giga)
additional check is made whether
the resulting value is in the range of Unit: -none- -none-
15 Hz to 65 Hz. Measured values m
outside this range are marked as in- kg
valid. s
A
°C
Note on factors: V
Selecting a multipier for the follow- Hz
ing units is not recommended and W
will be rejected: -none- Pa
° m2
°C m3
°F VA
% var
°
Wh
VAh
varh
%
°F

Input registers
Holding registers

and the corresponding measured value
cannot be selected for other functions.
Data format on bus Float32 (2 registers) Float32 (2 registers)

Int16 (1 register)
(See following table.) Int16_Ung8000h (1 register)
UInt16 (1 register)
UInt32 (2 registers)
Scaling factor 1.000 Any float value

0.00: resulting measured value = 0.00

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Data Format Description Setting Range Invalid Used by (example)

on Bus recognition
Float32 IEEE Float value -1038 to +1038 NaN = invalid SENTRON PAC3x00,
(2 registers) INF = overflow SICAM AI 7XV5674,
SICAM T 7KG966,
SICAM P50 7KG775
Int16 16-bit signed - 32 768 to +32 768 none SENTRON 3WL/3VL

(1 register) integer SICAM P50 7KG775
Int16_Ung8000 16-bit signed -32768 bis +32768 -32768 (8000h) SIPROTEC 4

(1 register) integer = ungültig
UInt16 16-bit integer, 0 to +65 535 none SENTRON 3WL/3VL

(1 register) 0
UInt32 32-bit integer, 0 to +4 294 967 295 none SIPROTEC 4,

(2 registers) 0 SENTRON 3WL/3VL
16.6.5.3 Mapping – Indications
Name Indication x Slv 1 Max. 31 characters

(x = 1 to 15)

Coil status registers
Input status registers
Input registers
Holding registers

and the corresponding indication cannot
be selected for other functions.
Data format on bus 1 Bit 1 Bit

1 Bit in UInt32
(See following table.)
Data format which is used to transmit the
indication via Modbus
Bit offset 0 0 to 15 (for Data format 1 Bit)

(only relevant for register types 0 to 31 (for Data format 1 Bit in UInt32)
Input register or Holding register)
depending on selection for Data format
on bus)

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Data Format on Bus Description Setting Range Invalid recognition
1 Bit 1 bit (for all register types; addition- 0 = of none

all select Bit offset for Input regis- 1 = on
ter and Holding register)
1 Bit in UInt32 1 bit in 2 successive Input registers 0 = of none

or Holding registers which have to 1 = on
be read together.
16.6.6 SICAM Subdevices

Subdevice 1 -none- -none-
SICAM IO
Subdevice 2
No further indications are
displayed.
Subdevice 1
Server IP address 192.168.0.56 Any
Server port 51 000 10 000 to 65 535
0 ms = invalid

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative

Parameter: Source of output 1-N Indication 3 from Remote Parameter: Source of output
(depending on parameterization):
-none-
Parameter: Source of output 2-N Indication 4 from Remote Device OK
Battery Failure
Indication: Input 2-N Binary inp. 2-N SICAM IO 1 Settings Load
Parameter: Source of output 3-N Indication 5 from Remote Settings Check
Settings Activate
Indication: Input 3-N Binary inp. 3-N SICAM IO 1 Modbus TCP OK
Ethernet Link Error
Parameter: Source of output 1-P Indication 6 from Remote Time Synchronization Error
Indication: Input 1-P Binary inp. 1-P SICAM IO 1 Secondary NTP Server Error
Default IP Address
Parameter: Source of output 3-P Indication 8 from Remote Indication 1 from Remote
Indication: Input 3-P Binary inp. 3-P SICAM IO 1 Rotation Voltage Clockwise
SD Card Error
Binary Input x-N SICAM IO 1 (x = 1 to
3) *)
Binary Input x-P SICAM IO 1 (x = 1 to
3) *)
3) *)
3) *)
Binary input 1 *)
Binary input 2 *)
New MSV record made
Indication x Slv y (x = 1 to 6; y = 1 to
8) *)
in the list box if they were parameter-
ized in Modbus Master Mapping.
*) Designation can be changed

during the parameterization.
Indication Input:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative

Subdevice 2
Server IP address 192.168.0.57 Any
Server port 51 000 10 000 to 65 535
0 ms = invalid

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative

Parameter: Source of output 1-N Indication 9 from Remote Parameter: Source of output
(depending on parameterization):
-none-
Device OK
Battery Failure
Settings Load
Parameter: Source of output 3-N Indication 11 from Remote Settings Check
Settings Activate
Indication: Input 3-N Binary inp. 3-N SICAM IO 1 Modbus TCP OK
Ethernet Link Error
Parameter: Source of output 1-P Indication 12 from Remote Time Synchronization Error
Indication: Input 1-P Binary inp. 1-P SICAM IO 1 Secondary NTP Server Error
Parameter: Source of output 2-P Indication 13 from Remote Daylight Saving Time
Indication: Input 2-P Binary inp. 2-P SICAM IO 1 Default IP Address
Parameter: Source of output 3-P Indication 14 from Remote Indication 1 from Remote
Indication: Input 3-P Binary inp. 3-P SICAM IO 1 Rotation Voltage Clockwise
SD Card Error
3) *)
3) *)
3) *)
3) *)
Binary input 1 *)
Binary input 2 *)
New MSV record made
Indication x Slv y (x = 1 to 6; y = 1 to
8) *)

in the list box if they were parameter-
ized in Modbus Master Mapping.
*) Designation can be changed
during the parameterization.
Indication Input:

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.7 Device and Language
Device name SICAM_xxx Max. 31 characters

Only a to z, A to Z, -, _, blank space, ., 0
to 9, Ü, ü, Ä, ä, Ö, ö, ß are permitted.
Language ENGLISH (US) ENGLISH (US)

User language acc. to preselection of
user language:
DEUTSCH (DE) or
CHINESE (CN)
Date/time format YYYY-MM-DD, YYYY-MM-DD, Time with 24 hours

Time with 24 hours YYYY-MM-DD, Time with 12 h AM/PM
DD-MM-YYYY, Time with 24 hours
DD-MM-YYYY, Time with 12 h AM/PM
MM/DD/YYYY, Time with 24 hours
MM/DD/YYYY, Time with 12 h AM/PM
User language preselection DEUTSCH (DE) DEUTSCH (DE)

CHINESE (CN)
16.6.8 Account Management
Table 16-1 Settings for Creating an Initial Account
Account Type Administrator User Account Manager

Administrator
New password Empty 8 to 24 characters

Contains at least:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;,
<, =, >, ?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, ‘, {, }, ~.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Table 16-2 Settings for Creating Local User Accounts

Contains at least:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;,
<, =, >, ?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, {, }, ~.
Roles Click one or several option buttons to

select a role or several roles for a local
user account according to Tabel 6-5.

Backup Operator
Security Auditor
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Installer
Viewer
Guest
General information viewing x 1) x x x x x x x x x
Operation data viewing - x x x x x - - - x
Configuration settings viewing - x x x x x - - - x
Force values - - x - x - - - - x
Configuration downloading - - - x x x - - - x
Configuration change and uploading - - - - x x - - - x
Firmware change - - - - - x - - - x
RBAC management - - - - - - x - x x
Security management - - - - - - x - - x
Audit trail - - - - - - - x - x
1)
x represents that the user with this role is assigned with related rights.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
Table 16-4 Settings for Editing a Local User Account

Contains at least:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;,
<, =, >, ?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, {, }, ~.
Roles Click one or several option buttons to

select a role or several roles for a local
user account according to Tabel 6-5.
Table 16-5 Settings for the HMI Password
Use HMI password yes no

yes
New password 000000 6 digital numbers (0 to 9)
Table 16-6 Settings for the RADIUS Server
RADIUS active no no
yes
Primary RADIUS server
Port 1812 10 000 to 65 535
Secondary RADIUS server
Port 1812 10 000 to 65 535

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.9 Security Settings
Table 16-7 Settings for the Security
Maximum consecutive attempts 5 5 times to 12 times
Consecutive password attempt 5 1 min to 10 min

time period
Logon block timeout 30 30 min to 360 min
Session timeout 10 1 min to 1440 min (1 day)

If the device restarts, you must log on again.
16.6.10 Password Management
Table 16-8 Settings for the Password Management
User name Fixed, not configurable The user name and roles depend on the settings
made by the account management.
Roles Empty 8 to 24 characters

Contains at least:
Current password • 1 capital letter (A to Z)
• 1 small letter (a to z)
New password
Repeat new password • 1 special character from the set:
!, “, #, $, %, &, ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -, ., /, :, ;, <, =, >,
?, @, [, \, ], ^, _, ‘, {, }, ~.

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
16.6 Administrative
16.6.11 Syslog
Syslog active No No
Yes
If you set the Syslog active parameter to yes, the following parameters are visible:
Primary Syslog server 0.0.0.0 Any
Port 514 0 to 65 535
Secondary Syslog server 0.0.0.0 Any
Port 514 0 to 65 535

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Glossary
A
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog-digital Converter
ARP Address Resolution Protocol: Network protocol
ASDU Application Service Data Unit
Big-Endian format The most significant byte is stored first, that is at the memory location with
the lowest address.
Boot Application Starting a device with the firmware required for the microcontroller
Broadcast message Message in the network where data packets are transmitted to all devices
on the network from one point
C
CDC Common Data Class (IEC 61850)
Client Device in the communication network that sends data requests or com-
mands to the server devices and receives responses from them
CRC error Cyclic Redundancy Check: The cyclic redundancy check is a method of de-
termining a test value for data (e.g. for data transmission in computer net-
works) with the purpose to detect errors during the transmission or
duplication of data.
DC Direct Current
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol enables the network configuration to

be assigned to the devices by a DHCP server
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DST Daylight Saving Time
Ethernet Cable-based data network technology for local data networks
FW Firmware: Program code for execution in a microcontroller
Gateway Enables networks based on different protocols to communicate with each

other

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Holding register Area for representing data in Modbus communication
ICD file IED Capability Description: Contains the standardized description of the
device configuration
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, standards organization; Com-

munication standard for substations and protection equipment
IEC 61850 Type of protocol to the data transmission via Ethernet
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
Indication off The status of the indication changes from ON to OFF, that is the indication
is deleted.
Indication on The status of the indication changes from OFF to ON, that is the indication
is currently present.
+Inf Stands for Infinity and denotes a counter overflow. Extremely large number
or infinitely positive number
IP Internet Protocol
IP address Addresses in computer networks based on the Internet protocol
JavaScript Script language mainly used by Web browsers
KeepAlive KeepAlive on TCP level is a feature intended to verify the availability and
functioning of the communication partner (client) and to maintain a TCP net-
work link if the network is inactive.
The server sends KeepAlive messages (TCP packets without data) to the
client in regular intervals (KeepAlive time) while the network is inactive, and
the client responds to these messages.
If the client does not respond to a KeepAlive message, the server assumes
that the link is down or the client is inactive and closes the TCP link.
LED Light-Emitting Diode
Limit violation A value exceeding or falling under a parameterized limiting value.
LSB Least Significant Bit
MAC-Address Media Access Control address: Hardware address that clearly identifies the
device on the network.
MBAP Modbus Application Protocol

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
MBAP Header Header of a Modbus TCP message consisting of these 4 parts: Transaction
identifier (2 bytes), protocol identifier (2 bytes), length (2 bytes), unit identifier
(1 byte).
MIB Management Information Base: Information which can be retrieved or mod-

ified via the SNMP network management protocol
Modbus The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol based on a client-server

architecture.
Modbus RTU Modbus Remote Terminal Unit: Modbus protocol type for transmitting data
over serial networks (e.g. RS485)
Modbus TCP Modbus Transmission Control Protocol: Modbus protocol type for transmit-
ting data as TCP/IP packets; TCP port 502 is reserved for Modbus TCP.
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSV Mains Signaling Voltage
NaN Not a Number means "invalid": Result of an invalid computing operation
NTP Network Time Protocol: Standard for synchronizing clocks in computer sys-
tems using packet-based communication networks
PQ Power Quality
Response timeout Time within which the Modbus slave has to respond to a request from Mod-
bus Master
RJ45 Ethernet plug connector
RS485 Interface standard for digital, wire-based, differential, serial data transmis-
sion
RTC Real-Time Clock
RTU See Modbus Remote Terminal Unit
RVC Rapid Voltage Change
Server Sends data upon request by the client
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol: Serves for monitoring and control-
ling network elements of a central station
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol: Simplified version of the NTP
SW Software: Program executed on a computer
Software filter time The software filter time has the effect that temporary switchover (L ®H, H
®L) at the binary inputs is not detected as real switchover (debouncing).
STP Shielded twisted-pair is the cable for 100Base-T (Ethernet).
Stratum Each NTP server is synchronized by a high-precision time standard or by

another NTP server. The stratum is the position of the NTP server in the hi-

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
erarchy of NTP servers polled by the device. The best stratum is 1, each fur-
ther level in the NTP server hierarchy increases the stratum by 1.
Subnet mask Bit mask in the network protocol that defines how many IP addresses the
computer network encompasses. Together with the IP address of a device,
the subnet mask defines which IP addresses the device searches in its own
network and which IP addresses it tries to reach via routers in other net-
works.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: Family of network proto-

cols
UTC Universal Time Coordinated: Universal time standard referred to the time at
the prime meridian

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Appendix
Config File for Multiple File Download via Firefox
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:mimetype:handler:application/x-unknown-content-type"
NC:alwaysAsk="false" NC:saveToDisk="ture">
<NC:exteralApplication RDF:resource="urn:mimetype:exteralApplication:application/x-unknown-content-
type"/>
</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:mimetype:application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:fileExtensions="pqd"

NC:description="Power Quality Data" NC:value="application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:editable="true">
<NC:handlerProp RDF:resource="urn:mimetype:handler:application/x-unknown-content-type"/>
</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:mimetype:application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:fileExtensions="cfg"

NC:description="COMTRADE" NC:value="application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:editable="true">
</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:mimetype:application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:fileExtensions="dat"

</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:mimetype:application/x-unknown-content-type" NC:fileExtensions="hdr"

</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Description RDF:about="urn:schemes">
<NC:Protocol-Schemes RDF:resource="urn:schemes:root"/>
</RDF:Description>
<RDF:Seq RDF:about="urn:mimetypes:root">
<RDF:li RDF:resource="urn:mimetype:application/pdf"/>
<RDF:li RDF:resource="urn:mimetype:text/plain"/>
<RDF:li RDF:resource="urn:mimetype:application/x-unknown-content-type"/>
</RDF:Seq>

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Index
A F
AC Calibration 327 Firmware Upload 302
Access Rights 120 Flicker 30, 32
Accuracy of the Frequency Measurement 79 Formatting the SD Card 305
Administrative Parameters 208
Application 17
Assembly 114, 115
Audit Log 312 G
Automation Functions 172
Getting Started 111
C H
Commissioning 122
Historical Load-Profile Data 85
Communication 18
HMI 177
Communication Ethernet 210
Communication Interfaces 128
Communication Serial via RS485 Interface 217
Config file for Multiply File Download via FireFox 441 I
Configuration of the Device 150
Connection Examples 129 Indications Signaled by LEDs 369
Connection Principle 125 Inspection 368
Connection Types 39, 129 Installing the Battery 112
Internal Time Keeping 362
Internal Time Synchronization via RTC 364
D
Data Availability of Measurements 54 L
Default IP Address 124
Device and Language 254 LED Indications 367
Device Design 25 LEDs 121
Device Information 148 Load Profile 181
Device Versions 20 Load-Profile 82, 92
Diagnosis 316
Diagnosis IEC 61850 318, 319
Diagnosis Modbus RTU Master 317
Diagnosis Modbus TCP 316 M
Display 27 Mains Signalling Voltage 32
Display Content 341 Maintenance 301
Display of Measurements 76 Meaning of the LEDs 121
Measurements 17, 39
Mechanical Design 26
E Menu Tree of the Main Menu 343
Modbus RTU Master and Modbus Gateway 336
Electrical Connection 117 Modbus Slave Devices 1-8 233
Enabling JavaScript 140
Energy Management 18, 81, 91, 181
Error Logs 311
Ethernet Interface 128 O
Evaluation and Data Management 275 Operating Parameters 397
External Time Synchronization per NTP 363 Operation at Use of a PC 137
External Time Synchronization via Fieldbus 364 Operation at Use of the Display 337
Operational Indications 393

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019
Operational Log 149, 310

Operational Measurements 39
Ordering Information 22
P
Parameterization 18
Power Quality Measuring System 30
Power Quality Recorder Types 34
Presets 306
Process Connections 160
R
Recorders 18
Recording and Evaluation of Measurements 68
Recording and Reporting 187
Recording System 30
Replacing a Used Battery 113
RS485 Interface 128
S
Safety Notes 117
SICAM Subdevices 246
Softkeys 27
Starting the User Interface 146
Synchronization of the Load Profile 87
System Requirements 119
T
Tariffs 89
Tariffs (TOU) 183
Technical Data 379
Terminals 126
Time Synchronization 18, 208, 361
Transients 31
U
User Information 17
User Interface 139, 144
V
Value View and Evaluation 260

E50417-H1040-C522-A7, Edition 10.2019

Man Sicam Q100 Us PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Man Sicam Q100 Us PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAN_SICAM_Q100_US.

book Page 1 Monday, October 21, 2019 1:48 PM

Open Source Software

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Document version: E50417-H1040-C522-A7.04 Trademarks

Purpose of this Manual

Scope of Validity of this Manual

Tel.: +49 (911) 433-7415

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 3

✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent death or severe injury.

✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent death or severe injury.

✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent minor injury.

✧ Follow all advice instructions to prevent damage to property.

4 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

Personnel Qualified in Electrical Engineering

Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 5

No. Symbol Description

3 Direct and alternating current

4 Three-phase alternating current

5 Earth (ground) terminal

6 Protective conductor terminal

7 Caution, risk of electric shock

8 Caution, risk of danger

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and

10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

6 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

Open-type Measuring Equipment

For further information see UL database on the internet: https://ul.com.

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 7

8 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

Open Source Software

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 9

10 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

4 Measured Quantities and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 11

6.2 Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

7 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

8 Connection Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

9 Operation at Use of a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

12 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

9.2 Start and Design of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

10 Operation at Use of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 13

11 Time Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

12 Maintenance, Storage, Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

13 Failures and LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

14 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

15 Operational Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

16 Operating Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

14 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

16.3 HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 15

16 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 17

Functionality of the Recorders

18 SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual

2.1 Device Versions 20

2.2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories 22

SICAM Q100, 7KG95xx, Device Manual 19

2.1 Device Versions

Consistent Device Properties

All devices consistently feature the following properties: